Professional Documents
Culture Documents
TOSHIBA Estudio 520, 523, 600, 623, 720, 723, 850, 853 Service Handbook PDF
TOSHIBA Estudio 520, 523, 600, 623, 720, 723, 850, 853 Service Handbook PDF
Model: DP-5200/6000/7200/8500
Publish Date: March 2005
File No. SHE040005I0
R04102168901-TTEC
Ver09_2007-11
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft prod-
ucts are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other coun-
tries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other
countries.
• PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.
1) Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to move it by the
casters while lifting the stoppers.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 210 kg (463 lb), therefore pay full atten-
tion when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the RADF) when transporting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A for
its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
07/11
2) General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, IH control circuit,
developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD back-
light and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched
since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is
turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.
06/09
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batter-
ies and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
3. ADJUSTMENT
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
8. REMOTE SERVICE
10
05/11
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1
1.1 Specifications
Destinations (machine versions) of e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853
• The machine versions of e-STUDIO600/720/850 are as follows :
TNA / NAD: North America / Central and South America
TWD: Taiwan
SAD: Saudi Arabia
ASD: Asia / Central and South America / Other
ASU: Asia / Other
ARD: Argentina
AUD / DAU: Australia
MJD / DMJ: Europe
CND: China
KRD: Korea
• The drawer configuration of each model differs depending on its destination (machine version).
Destination
e-STUDIO520 e-STUDIO600 e-STUDIO720 e-STUDIO850
(Machine version)
TNA Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF -
NAD 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers
TWD - 4 drawers 4 drawers Tandem LCF
SAD - 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers
ASD - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
ASU - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
ARD - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
AUD Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
DAU 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers -
MJD Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
DMJ 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers -
CND - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
KRD - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
Destination
e-STUDIO523 e-STUDIO603 e-STUDIO723 e-STUDIO853
(Machine version)
TNA Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF -
NAD 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers
ARD - Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
MJD Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
DMJ 4 drawers 4 drawers 4 drawers -
CND Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF Tandem LCF
* Tandem LCF: This means 2 drawers and a tandem LCF.
In this manual, a standard LCF is called the Tandem LCF (T-LCF), and MP-4004A/L is called the Option
LCF (O-LCF).
e-STUDIO520/523
Drawer Tandem Bypass feed
Option
Paper size 3rd 4th LCF(*2) Size Size not
1st 2nd LCF(*3)
(*1) (*1) specified specified
A4, B5, Top side 52 52 52 52 52 45 28 52
A5-R, LT, discharging
ST-R Back side 52 52 52 52 52 45 28 52
discharging
A4-R, Top side 42 42 42 42 - 37 28 -
B5-R, LT-R discharging
Back side 42 42 42 42 - 37 28 -
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 37 37 37 37 - 32 28 -
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 37 37 37 37 - 32 28 -
discharging
A3, LD Top side 33 33 33 33 - 28 28 -
discharging
Back side 31 31 31 31 - 28 28 -
discharging
e-STUDIO600/603
Drawer Tandem Bypass feed
Option
Paper size 3rd 4th LCF(*2) Size Size not
1st 2nd LCF(*3)
(*1) (*1) specified specified
A4, B5, Top side 60 60 60 60 60 46 30 60
A5-R, LT, discharging
ST-R Back side 60 60 60 60 60 46 30 60
discharging
A4-R, Top side 46 46 46 46 - 38 30 -
B5-R, LT-R discharging
Back side 46 46 46 46 - 38 30 -
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 41 41 41 41 - 34 30 -
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 38 38 38 38 - 34 30 -
discharging
A3, LD Top side 36 36 36 36 - 30 30 -
discharging
Back side 32 32 32 32 - 30 30 -
discharging
e-STUDIO850/853
Drawer Tandem Bypass feed
Option
Paper size 3rd 4th LCF(*2) Size Size not
1st 2nd LCF(*3)
(*1) (*1) specified specified
A4, B5, Top side 85 85 85 85 85 50 34 85
A5-R, LT, discharging
ST-R Back side 85 85 85 85 85 50 34 85
discharging
A4-R, Top side 61 61 61 61 - 42 34 -
B5-R, LT-R discharging
Back side 56 56 56 56 - 42 34 -
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 52 52 52 52 - 38 34 -
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 45 45 45 45 - 38 34 -
discharging
A3, LD Top side 43 43 43 43 - 34 34 -
discharging
Back side 37 37 37 37 - 34 34 -
discharging
*1 : The 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are standard equipments for NAD, SAD, DAU, DMJ and TWD
(e-STUDIO600/720) versions.
*2 : The Tandem LCF is a standard equipment for TNA, ASD, ASU, ARD, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD and
TWD (e-STUDIO850) versions. Only A4/LT can be used for the Tandem LCF.
*3 : Only A4, B5 and LT can be used for the Option LCF.
* Each copy speed has been measured in the Continuous Copy Mode, using single-sided originals
placed on the original glass manually.
* Accuracy: Within ±2 sheets (Bypass feed) / Within ±1 sheet (Other paper sources)
* A hyphen ("-") indicates that the combination is invalid for the subject paper source.
* Values may vary depending on its use condition and environment.
* When the RADF is used, each copy speed per minute of e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/
853 has reached 52/60/72/85 sheets. These copy speeds can be realized only in the following con-
ditions.
• Original: A4/LT / 1 sheet
Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m² (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond))
Paper source: Bypass feed
e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO
520/523 600/603 720/723 850/853
Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
A4, B5, A5-R, Top side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34
LT, ST-R discharging
Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34
discharging
A4-R, B5-R, Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34
LT-R discharging
Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34
discharging
A3, LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34
discharging
Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34
discharging
* Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m² (90 lb. Index))
Paper source: Bypass feed
e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO
520/523 600/603 720/723 850/853
Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
A4, B5, A5-R, Top side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34
LT, ST-R discharging
Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 50 34
discharging
A4-R, B5-R, Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34
LT-R discharging
Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 42 34
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 38 34
discharging
A3, LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34
discharging
Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 34 34
discharging
* Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m² (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m² (115.7 lb. Index))
Paper source: Bypass feed
e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO e-STUDIO
520/523 600/603 720/723 850/853
Size specified Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
A4, B5, A5-R, Top side 45 28 46 30 46 30 46 30
LT, ST-R discharging
Back side 45 28 46 30 46 30 46 30
discharging
A4-R, B5-R, Top side 37 28 38 30 38 30 38 30
LT-R discharging
Back side 37 28 38 30 38 30 38 30
discharging
B4, FOLIO, Top side 32 28 34 30 34 30 34 30
LG, discharging
COMPUTER Back side 32 28 34 30 34 30 34 30
discharging
A3, LD Top side 28 28 30 30 30 30 30 30
discharging
Back side 28 28 30 30 30 30 30 30
discharging
* Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
• Copy paper
Duplex Tandem
Drawer Bypass copy Remarks
copy LCF
Size A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, A4, LT A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO,
FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5",
8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R 8K, 16K, 16K-R
(Non-standard or user-speci-
fied sizes can be set.)
Weight 64 to 209g/m² ( 17 lb. Bond to 115.7 lb. Index)
Special paper Tab paper - Tracing paper (75g/m² only), These special
(2nd drawer is Labels, OHP film, Tab paper, papers recom-
recommended) mended by
Toshiba Tec
• Density control ..............Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps
1213 m m
789 mm 698 m m
Fig. 1-1
Drum OD-6510
Developer D-6000
Toner e-STUDIO520/600/720/850:
PS-ZT6000D (for other)
PS-ZT6000E (for MJD, DMJ)
PS-ZT6000 (for TNA, NAD)
e-STUDIO523/603/723/853:
PS-ZT6000D (for CND)
PS-ZT7200 (for TNA, NAD, ARD)
PS-ZT7200E (for MJD, DMJ)
Toner bag PS-TB6510E (for MJD, DMJ)
PS-TB6510 (for other)
Antena
Staple cartridge GN-3010
STAPLE-700
Printer kit.ELK
GM-1050/1051
Finisher Inserter GM-1110
MJ-1027 MJ-7001
Hole punch unit Printer/
MJ-6003N/E/F/S Scanner kit.ELK
GM-2040/2041
GM-2110
Scanner kit.ELK
07/11
1 - 13
overwrite kit
Fig. 1-2
STAPLE-600 FAX board PCI slot GP-1060
GD-1170 GO-1050
Memory
GC-1230
Saddle stitch finisher
MJ-1028
LCF
MP-4004L/A
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 © 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 14
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or
“CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking. 2
2.1.1 Jam
Notes:
1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagno-
sis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line con-
nectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be
sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connect-
ing the modular code.
<Operation procedure>
• Control panel check mode (01):
[POWER] OFF/ON
[0][1] LED lit/ (Exit)
[START] (Button check)
[POWER] LCD blinking
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
• Test print mode (04): Refer to P.2-40 "2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04)".
• List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to (Exit)
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
[6][START]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
1: Auto-toner adjustment (Operation started) (Exit)
2: PM Support Screen
[POWER]
ON
Normal
Control panel Test print Adjustment Setting List print PM support Firmware
Warming up check mode Test mode mode mode mode mode update mode
mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and
the digital keys in the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure> 2
[0][3] [FAX]
[START] or [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] [COPY] (Exit)
[CLEAR]
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
*1
• Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with
this code.
• Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
• It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB stor-
age device.
Status of the output signals can be checked by keying in the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
Operation Operation Test mode OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START] [CLEAR] standby
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF
[POWER]
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode
(04).
<Operation procedure>
[0][4]
(Code) [START] Operation [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] Continuous (Exit)
Test Printing
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not per-
formed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjust-
ment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in
order to enter this mode.
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds. 2
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
[ENTER] ([FAX]
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT]
or
[COPY])
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Value unchangeable) (Test copy) (Exit)
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] ([FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or or [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] [COPY]) OFF/ON
(Key in a value) (Test copy) (Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
(Stores value
in RAM )
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] ([FAX]
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic [POWER]
[POWER] (Code)
[START] ( adjustment ) ( Stores value
in RAM )
or
[COPY]) OFF/ON
(Test copy) (Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 10
[POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value
[POWER] (Code)
[START]
(Sub code)
[START] ( displayed ) [START] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] ([FAX]
[0][5] [POWER]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
( Automatic
adjustment ) or
[INTERRUPT]
or
[COPY]) OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Test copy)
( Stores
in RAM )
value
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after
it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
354 RADF Adjustment of for single - ALL 10 SYS When the value 1
RADF paper sided orig- <0-20> increases by “1”, the
alignment inal aligning amount
355 for double ALL 10 SYS increases by approx. 1
sided orig- <0-20> 0.5 mm.
inal
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing
the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[HELP] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value) 2
* Press [HELP] to enter “-”.
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] or (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Select icon] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key] or
[START] [START] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
(hexadecimal number)
1774 General Card reader format infor- ALL - SYS The data of the block 5
mation -2 number in the noncon-
tact IC is set.
KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU
(hexadecimal number)>
PP:1st block
Q: 1st block beginning
byte
R: 1st block ending-
byte
SS:2nd block
T: 2nd block begin-
ning byte
U: 2nd block ending
byte
KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block num-
ber
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement 2
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
* For the cleaning web, this means the total feeding amount for controlling the cleaning web.
(1 count = 1 mm).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Barring the exceptions, sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• Barring the exceptions, when the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is
also updated and vice versa.
• When “0” is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to “0”.
(Exceptions: 08-1228, 08-1252)
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is dis-
played).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
Fig. 2-3
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” with the digital key and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-
ton.)
(A) (B)
Fig. 2-4
(A) (B)
2
Fig. 2-5
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Ex.)
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
2
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
X/2
X/10
6% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig. 2-7 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
2004.7.11 09:55 2
TONERCARTRIDGE
2004.7.11 09:55
SERVICEMAN
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed divid-
ing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.
100% A A3
[0][5] TEST MODE
[POWER]
Fig. 3-1
230% 200 A3
[200] [START] TEST MODE
128 128
C A
Fig. 3-2
Notes:
• A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output.
• B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
• C indicates the latest adjustment value.
230% 200 A3
TEST MODE WAIT
128 128
Fig. 3-3
(5) After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
240% 200 A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
128 150
A
Fig. 3-4
(6) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the
following is displayed.
The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.
[ENTER]
100% A A3
or TEST MODE
[INTERRUPT]
Fig. 3-5
0 to 29.9 2.46
30.0 to 44.9 2.48
45.0 to 59.9 2.50
60.0 to 74.9 2.64
75.0 to 100 2.78
(8) Key in code [290] and press the [START] button. When the message "WAIT" goes off, turn the
power OFF by shutdown.
1 Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 480
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start posi- 408, 428, 429, 440, 441, 442,
tion 443, 444, 445
100% A A3
0 5 TEST MODE
POWER
1
Digital keys : Enter codes. Code No.
100% XXX A3
START
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment YYY ZZZ Adjustment value newly entered
values. (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
( CLEAR Use to make corrections) Current adjustment value
Fig. 3-6
Fig. 3-7
Fig. 3-8
Fig. 3-9
Fig. 3-10
Plain 64-80 g/m2 450 (*1) 452 (*1) 448 (*1) 449 (*1) 457 455 (*1) - 458 (*1)
paper 17-20 lb.
Thick 81-105g/m2 469 (*1) 470 (*1) 471 (*1) 472 (*1) 473-0 474 (*1) - 460 (*1)
paper 1 21-28 lb.
Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size1 3:Short size 4:Post card
(*2) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size1 of OHP film
3: Short size 2 of OHT film 4:Post card size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches)
Short size2: 160-204 mm (6.3-8.0 inches)
Post card: 159 mm or shorter (6.2 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.
Fig. 3-11
1 21
A
6
B, E
D
3
6
Feeding direction
C
26
Adjustment
Detail of adjustment
Tolerance
A 200 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))”
B 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)”
C 200 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment
of transfer belt motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))”
D 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position”
E 52 ± 0.5mm Refer to “[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line
to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
(6) After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment mode)
(2) Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 6th line
at the leading edge of the paper to the 26th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
* Image location of all paper sources can be adjusted in the Adjustment mode (05-408)
For 4 drawers
Order for Acceptable
Paper source Code Paper size Remarks
adjustment value
- All 408 - 0 to 80
4 LCF 443 A4 0 to 40
- All 408 - 0 to 80
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading
edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 3
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT in the 1st
drawer/tandem LCF.
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig. 3-13
Fig. 3-15
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3) Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START]
(Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
(“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the dis-
tance A become.
(e-STUDIO 520/523/600/603/720/723: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850/853: 0.1 mm/step)
250
200
A
100
50
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-16
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
(3) Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 100 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-17
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the distance C from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-18
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
10 20 30 40
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-19
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 ± 0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-20
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above. 3
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-21
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode)
(3) Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-22
503 501 504 Manual density mode center The larger the value is, the darker the
(931) (933) (932) value image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
3
505 506 507 Manual density mode light The larger the value is, the lighter the
(934) (936) (935) step value light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
508 509 510 Manual density mode dark The larger the value is, the darker the
(937) (939) (938) step value dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
514 512 515 Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the
(940) (942) (941) image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5) Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the copying job.
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
593 594 595 Gamma slope adjustment 1 to 9: Select the gamma slope
(943) (945) (944) angle. (The larger the value
is, the larger the angle
becomes.)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
600 602 601 Background adjustment 1 to 9: The larger the value is, the
(946) (947) (948) background becomes lighter.
Photo Item to be
Remarks
Text/Photo Text adjusted
Error diffu- Dither pro-
sion process cess
620 621-0 621-1 622 Sharpness Key in the following values depend-
(922) (924-0) (924-1) (923) adjustment ing on the original mode.
One’s place
1: Text/Photo 3: Photo 2: Text
Ten’s place
1 to 9: Change intensity
(The larger the value is, the sharper
the image becomes.)
• Example of value entry in case
the mode is “Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/
Photo mode
Key in a value 1 to 9
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
570 571 572 Range correction for original The following are the default values
(913) (915) (914) manually set on the original set for each original mode.
glass Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for: 3
693 694 695 Range correction for original One’s place: Automatic density mode
(916) (918) (917) set on the RADF Ten’s place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
532 533 534 Background peak for range When the value increases, the back-
(919) (921) (920) correction ground (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
653 Adjustment of smudged/faint When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
(928) spotted text When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
654 655 When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
3
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the printing job.
(6) If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
596-0 597-0 598-0 599-0 Low density The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
596-1 597-1 598-1 599-1 Medium density adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
596-2 597-2 598-2 599-2 High density 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ¨ The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
663 664 665 Image density adjustment The image density level in the Printer function can
be set.
The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-27 "3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text".
845 847 846 848 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
mode center value the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
850 852 851 853 Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter
mode light step the light side becomes.
3
value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
855 857 856 858 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker
mode dark step the dark side becomes.
value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
860 862 861 863 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker
mode the image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
865-0 867-0 866-0 868-0 150 to 200 dpi Key in the following values
depending on the original mode.
865-1 867-1 866-1 868-1 300 to 400 dpi One’s place
Leave the value in one’s place at
865-2 867-2 866-2 – 600 dpi the fixed value.
Ten’s place
1 to 9: Change intensity
• The larger the value is, the
sharper the image becomes.)
• Example of value entry in
case the mode is “Text/
Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/
Photo mode
Key in a value 1 to 9
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(3) Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(7) Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
825 827 826 828 Range correction The following are the default val-
for original manu- ues set for each original mode.
ally set on the origi- Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text:
nal glass 12, Gray Scale:12 3
Each digit stands for:
830 832 831 833 Range correction One’s place: Automatic density
for original set on mode
the RADF Ten’s place: Manual density
mode
The setting conditions possible
are as follows:
Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
835 837 836 838 Background peak When the value increases, the
for range correc- background (low density area) of
tion the image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 40, photo:
16, text: 48, Gray Scale:16)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
3.6.1 Measurement
[ 1 ] Preparation
Remarks Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 MΩ (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON the power Attach the door switch jig and start with the adjustment mode [05] while the
front cover opened.
[ 2 ] Installing Jig
Fig. 3-23
Fig. 3-24
Fig. 3-25
[0][5] 100% A A3
[POWER]
TEST MODE
TEST MODE 3
[START]
YYY
Current set value
[CANCEL]
100% A A3
TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter the
other adjustment code.
[POWER] : OFF
Disconnect the digital testers and return the equipment to its original state.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[POWER] : After the message "WAIT" has disappeared, turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Fig. 3-26
Note:
If the output value does not reach a specified level, replace the high-voltage transformer.
Remark:
Transfer bias ON timing adjustment(Not essential)
Depending on the environmental condition or the paper type, transfer ability for the paper leading edge
may decrease slightly and the poor image transfer may occur.
In this case, the image quality can be improved by adjusting the leading edge void width wider. Also, it
can be improved by changing the transfer bias ON timing using the setting code 08-841.
* The transfer ability for the paper leading edge and the paper separation ability from the photo-con-
ductive drum are inversely related as shown in the table below.
Therefore, if the value is increased too much, this may cause the slight decrease of the paper sepa-
ration ability from the photo-conductive drum. So, when adjusting the value, be sure to check the
paper feeding as well as the image quality.
0 Approx. 1.4 mm slower than the Approx. 1.6 mm slower than the | Separation abil-
standard ON timing standard ON timing | ity improves
|
1 Same as the standard ON tim- Same as the standard ON tim- | |
ing. ing. | |
(Default value) (Default value) | |
| |
2 Approx. 1.4 mm faster than the Approx. 1.6 mm faster than the | |
standard ON timing standard ON timing. | |
3 Approx. 2.8 mm faster than the Approx. 3.3 mm faster than the | |
standard ON timing. standard ON timing. | |
|
4 Approx. 7.1 mm faster than the Approx. 8.2 mm faster than the Transfer ability |
standard ON timing. standard ON timing. improves |
3.7.1 Carriages
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
3
Bracket for carriage-1
Idler pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-27
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-28
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the car-
riage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
(2) Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage-
2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2
Pulley bracket
[Rear] [Front]
B A
Fig. 3-29
(3) Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear] [Front]
Bracket Bracket
D C
Fig. 3-30
(1) Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
• 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
• 5 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire. 3
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
5 turns 5 turns
2 turns 2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook Hook
[Rear] [Front]
Fig. 3-31
Notes:
• When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
• The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the
arm and the jig.
Arm
Fig. 3-32
Fig. 3-33
• Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-34
(1) Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LT-
sized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
Fig. 3-35
(3) If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
Lens unit
Fig. 3-36
0.1% 0.5 mm
0.2% 0.9 mm
0.3% 1.4 mm
0.4% 1.8 mm
0.5% 2.3 mm
0.6% 2.7 mm 3
0.7% 3.2 mm
0.8% 3.6 mm
0.9% 4.1 mm
1.0% 4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-37
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the “Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)”.
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(5) Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
(6) Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
<Procedure>
(2) Loosen 2 screws. Then tighten these screws when the belt is tensed enough.
Screw
Fig. 3-38
<Procedure>
The center of the printed image shifts to the front The center of the printed image shifts to the rear
side. -> Move the guide to the front side when side. -> Move the guide to the rear side when
feeding paper from the bypass tray or the drawer. feeding paper from the bypass tray or the drawer.
Move the front cover to the rear side when feed- Move the front cover to the front side when feed-
ing paper from the Tandem LCF. (Arrow (A) direc- ing paper from the Tandem LCF. (Arrow (B) direc-
tion in the lower figure). tion in the lower figure).
3
[Rear] [Rear]
[Front] [Front]
(A)
(1) Remove the screw 1 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 2 on the right side, and
then temporarily fix it to the oblong hole. rescrew it to the oblong hole.
(2) Loosen the screw 2 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 1 on the right side.
(3) Remove screw 3, and then temporarily fix to the oblong hole.
(4) Move the front cover of the Tandem LCF to the front or rear side, and then tighten screw 1 and 2.
(5) Align the surface of the covers of the 2nd drawer and Tandem LCF. If they do not align, adjust
the angle of the Tandem LCF front cover.
1 1
2 (A)
2
(B)
3 3
Fig. 3-43
Note:
When the sideways deviation has been adjusted for the Tandem LCF feeding, adjust its protrud-
ing point.
If the Tandem LCF drawer cannot be closed securely, decrease the protruding amount.
(When the value decreases in increments of "1", the protruding amount decreases by 1 mm.)
(1) Move 2 screws of the bracket on the rear side in the same increments as the digit of the scale
at right on the front side.
(In case of No. 5, 6 and 7, place the bracket upside down to install it.)
Bracket
Protruded
distance
Max 7
Min 1
Screw
Fig. 3-44
<Procedure> 3
(1) Take off the paper feed unit. (Refer to the Service Manual Chapter 9.)
(2) Remove 1 screw, and then screw it tempo-
rarily to an oblong hole located next to it.
Note:
Make a mark for the installation position of
the bracket in advance.
Fig. 3-45
Fig. 3-46
Fig. 3-47
<Procedure>
(1) Open the RADF and make a copy with A3/LD size (solid copy).
(3) Open the front cover quickly, and pull out the transfer/transport unit.
(4) Insert the copy made in (1) into the fuser entrance guide with the image side facing down while
turning the jam release lever CCW until the center of the copy paper isnipped by the heat roller.
(5) Leave the copy paper for about 20 seconds, and then take it out by quickly turning the jam
release lever CCW again.
(6) Measure the width of the area nipped by the heat and pressure rollers at the front and the rear.
Rear
R
F Nipped part
Front
Fig. 3-48
(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaning web unit.
(8) If |F-R| >= 0.5mm, lift up the upper separation finger unit and loosen the fixing screw of the pres-
sure spring on the side with the wider nip width. One half turn corresponds to narrowing the
nipped section by about 0.5mm.
Fig. 3-49
Change the fuser roller temperature (in ready status, during printing).
To improve fusing efficiency, a change is made in the range of the setting value between "12" and "14"
(200°C to 210°C).
<Setting mode(08)>
Code Contents
Notes:
1. When a large value is set (to increase the temperature), the level of wrinkling, curling and
toner transfer deficiency at the leading/trailing edges of the duplex print tends to be wors-
ened.
2. Do not set the fuser roller temperature in the ready status (08-411) higher than the one during
printing (08-410, 413, 437, 412).
3. When printing with OHP, remember that the OHP films tend to stick together if the setting
value for the fuser roller temperature (08-1804) is higher than the default value.
Change the starting temperature of the pressure roller low speed pre-running during ready in the setting
mode (08-845, 847). To improve the fusing quality, change the setting value to "12" (110°C).
Note:
The frequency of pre-running is increased when the starting temperature of the pressure roller
pre-runningduring ready is increased.
Adjust the fuser entrance guide following the procedure below until the troubles are cleared.
1.0 mm
0.5 mm
Scale
3 1 4 2
Fig. 3-50
<Adjustment procedure>
(1) Move the screw to the screw hole 2 and check the gap. (Fixed value of the gap is 1.3 mm.)
(2) Move the screw to the screw hole 3 and check the gap. (Fixed value of the gap is 1.8 mm.)
(3) Move the screw to the oblong hole 4 and adjust the gap. (Adjust it with o.4<gap<1.7.)
* The scale is marked off in ±1 mm (Also adjust the leveling of the fuser entrance guide after
the screw has been moved to the oblong hole 4 and the adjustment has been made)
3
4 (Max 1.7 mm)
2
1
1
4 (Min 0.4mm)
Fig. 3-51
<Setting mode(08)>
Code Contents
The level for the continuous printing is set at the "high-fusing mode (08-433)". The level is raised
by delaying the printing cycle and controlling not to lower the fuser roller temperature.
Note:
08-417 of (1) and 08-433 of (2) can be combined.
<Setting mode(08)>
Code Contents Default Values
858 Changing Printing Speed (Plain paper) 0 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled only for 5min.
2: Always enabled
3
859 Changing Printing Speed (Thick paper 1) 0 0:Disabled, 1: Enabled only for 5min.
2: Always enabled
860 Changing Printing Speed (Thick paper 2) 0 0:Disabled, 1: Enabled only for 5min.
2: Always enabled
861 Changing Printing Speed (Thick paper 3) 0 0:Disabled, 1: Enabled only for 5min.
2: Always enabled
Notes:
1. This adjustment is valid for e-STUDIO600/720/850.
2. When the setting value "1" is selected, the printing speed slows down if the fuser roller tem-
perature drops for only 5 minutes after the warming-up time.
3. When the setting value "2" is selected, the printing speed slows down if the fuser roller tem-
perature drops.
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-52
Positioning pin
Fig. 3-53
Fig. 3-54
Fig. 3-55
Fig. 3-56
Fig. 3-57
Fig. 3-58
Fig. 3-59
Fig. 3-60
Fig. 3-61
Fig. 3-62
<Procedure>
0 mm
ADF original glass ADF original glass
Fig. 3-63
(2) Adjust the height of the hinge by turning the height adjusting screw on the hinge.
CW: The height of the hinge becomes high.
CCW: The height of the hinge becomes low.
Adjustment screw
Fig. 3-64
Note:
Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly.
Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted.
(1) Step 1
Case A:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side A to adjust the image
skew.
Case B:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side B to adjust the image
3
skew.
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-65
(A) (A)
(B)
(B)
Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position ±0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.
C D
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-68
Adjustment screw
Fig. 3-69
E F
Paper
Original
3
Fig. 3-70
(A)
(B)
Fig. 3-71
Refer to "16.13 Disassembly and Replacement [F] Solenoid" for the procedure to disassemble the sole-
noid.
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-72
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-73
<Adjustment procedure>
Fig. 3-74
Glass surface
Fig. 3-75
Fig. 3-76
Fig. 3-77
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-78
(2) Place a paper on the tray.
(3) Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. This causes the finisher to execute automatic adjust-
ment, in which the tray unit will shift.
• At the end of adjustment, trays will return to their home positions.
• During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns and remains.
• If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the tray in question is being adjusted
(at the same time, LED1 turns OFF).
(4) Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the host machine once. This causes the finisher to
execute automatic adjustment, in which the tray unit will shift.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
Fig. 3-79
(3) If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. If you are using LT paper,
press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
• Pressing SW1/2 will open the swing guide and cause the alignment plate to move to A4/LT
positions.
(4) WPlace 10 sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plate and the guide plate, butting them
against the stoppers.
(5) Press SW1 or SW2 on the finisher controller PCB, and butt the alignment plate, against the
sheets.
• Pressing SW1 will shift the alignment plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments.
• Pressing SW2 will shift the alignment plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.
(6) Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value (this will lower the swinging
guide).
(7) Shift all bits of SW3 OFF, and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-80
(3) If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. If you are using LT paper,
press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
• Pressing SW1/2 will open the swing guide and cause the feed belt to rotate.
(4) Within 5 seconds after pressing the switch, place one sheet of A4/LT paper between the align-
ment plate and the guide plate, butting it against the stoppers.
• When the finisher detects the paper, it will lower the swing guide and execute stapling (rear, 1-
position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.
Alignment Stapler
plate
Stopper
Stopper
Guide plate
Fig. 3-81
(5) If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need
to change the stapling position,on the other hand, go to the next step.
291±2mm (A4)/
273±2mm (LT)
Staple
Paper
3
Fig. 3-82
(7) Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously.
• This will open the swing guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate. Placement of one sheet of
A4/LT paper will cause the finisher to start stapling.
(8) Check the stapling position. If good, set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If re-adjustments are necessary,
go back to Step 6.
Caution:
The settings held by the finisher controller PCB are changed as soon as SW1 or SW2 is pressed.
As such, to recover the previous settings after the press, you must press the other of the two
switches as many times as you pressed previously.
The "winding amount" is the amount of difference between the First and Second sheets wound onto the
buffer roller device in the feed direction.
Second sheet
Paper delivery
direction
Third sheet
Fig. 3-83
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-84
(3) Set the mode setting on the host machine to "1" and the number of originals (A4 or LT) to "3" in
the staple mode.
(5) Remove the stack of sheets from the finisher delivery taking care to prevent the offset of the out-
put sheets from changing.
Paper delivery 3
direction
Third sheet
Second sheet
First sheet
Fig. 3-85
(7) If the amount is within the standard, turn the host machine OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to
OFF. If the amount is outside the standard, perform the following.
(8) Turn the host machine OFF, and set SW3 on the finisher contoroller PCB as indicated. If
EEPROM (Q2) on the finisher controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step 10.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-86
(9) Turn the host machine ON, and then press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
• The current setting values are displayed at LED1.
Adjustment value 0 Lights for 1 second (once)
Adjustment value -N Lights for 1 second (once), and blinks (lights for 0.2
second) for N times.
(10) Turn the host machine OFF, and then set SW3 on the finisher controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-87
Paper
delivery
direction Third sheet
Second sheet
First sheet
Movement of Movement of
direction of direction of
1st sheet by SW2 1st sheet by SW1
Fig. 3-88
(12) Repeat steps 1) though 6) twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both
times.
(13) Turn the host machine OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF. This completes the adjustment.
(1) Remove the PCB cover, and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the saddle stitcher controller
PCB as indicated.
3
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not change
bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 3-89
(2) Remove the rear cover of the saddle stitcher unit, and tape the actuator of the inlet cover sensor
(PI9S) and the inlet cover switch (MS1S) of the saddle stitcher unit in place.
(3) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper (you will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper).
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-90
(5) Open the inlet cover, and insert two sheets of paper (push them in by hand until the leading edge
of the sheets butts against the paper positioning plate).
Sheets Mark
(6) Close the inlet door while holding it down with your hand.
Mark
Positive Width Adjustment
Folding position
L
Stitching position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide “+1 mm”.
Mark
Negative Width Adjustment
Stitching position
L
Folding position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide “-0.5 mm”.
Fig. 3-91
OFF ON ON +3
OFF ON OFF +2
OFF OFF ON +1
ON OFF ON -1
ON ON OFF -2
ON ON ON -3
ON OFF OFF
(2) Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the finisher controller PCB as indicated.
ON
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-92
(3) Press SW1 on finisher controller PCB. Pressing this switch automatically adjusts sensor output.
(2) Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the finisher controller PCB as indicated.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-93
(3) Set bits 7 and 8 on DIPSW3 on the finisher controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of
the attached puncher unit according to the table.
(4) Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3-hole model (MJ-
6003N). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the punch driver PCB.
(2) Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the finisher controller PCB as indicated.
ON
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-94
(3) Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. Pressing this switch lights LED1 on the finisher con-
troller PCB as indicated in the table so that you can check the sensitivity level of the transmission
sensor.
Mode LED
Punch LED LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 Start LED
(1) Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2) Press the mode key and set up only the mode LED3 to light ON, and press the start key. (The
start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(4) Move the tray guide to the position where its width becomes the narrowest, and press the start
key.
(5) The mode LED display switches. (The mode LED1, 4 blink.)
(6) Move the tray guide to the position where its width becomes the broadest.
Success - -
: Blinking
: Light ON
- : Light OFF
(1) Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2) Press the mode key and set up the LED1 to blink and LED2~4 to light OFF, and press the start
key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(3) Press the mode key and check the operations referring to the following table. The operational
mode is switched at every time the mode key is pressed.
* Num (at the right table): the number of times which the key is pressed
* At the operational mode 7~36, the motor rotation speed is switched whenever the start key is
pressed. The motor rotation speed can be checked by referring to the mode LED blinking
speed.
: Blinking
: Light ON
- : Light OFF
(2) Press the mode key and set up the mode LED2 to blink and mode LED1, 3, 4 to light OFF, and
press the start key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(3) Check the ON/OFF status of each sensor through the mode LED display.
* The display is switched whenever the start key is pressed.
LED display
When the start switch is OFF:
(1) Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2) Press the mode key and set up the mode LED1, 2 to blink and mode LED3, 4 to light OFF, and
press the start key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LED light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(3) Check the ON/OFF status of each sensor through the mode LED display.
* The display is switched whenever the start key is pressed.
LED display
When the start switch is OFF:
Light ON Dip-switch 1 ON
Light ON Dip-switch 2 ON
Light ON Dip-switch 3 ON
Light ON Dip-switch 4 ON
<Procedure>
3
A B
Adjustment board
Fig. 3-95
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Center
[Front]
Fig. 3-96
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Center
[Front]
Fig. 3-97
Note:
After the tray position adjustment, re-adjust the front cover position. Adjustment: loosen 4
screws and slide the front cover to adjust the gap between the front and upper cover, and the
front and right cover to 3 mm respectively.
Front cover
Fig. 3-98
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-99
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig. 4-1
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
10
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fig. 4-2
2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 4-3
3 Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
5 Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
7 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
8 Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
1 2
Fig. 4-4
1 When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to 4
the main or sub screen.
2 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages counts” and
“Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
1st drawer [1st CST.] 1st drawer pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
1st drawer feed roller [FEED ROLLER (1st CST.)]
1st drawer separation roller [SEP ROLLER (1st CST.)]
2nd drawer [2nd CST.] 2nd cassette pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
2nd cassette feed roller [FEED ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
2nd cassette separation roller [SEP ROLLER (2nd CST.)]
Bypass feed unit [SFB] Bypass pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (SFB)]
Bypass feed roller [FEED ROLLER (SFB)]
Bypass separation roller [SEP ROLLER (SFB)]
T-LCF feed unit [T-LCF] T-LCF pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (T-LCF)]
T-LCF feed roller [FEED ROLLER (T-LCF)]
T-LCF separation roller [SEP ROLLER (T-LCF)]
3rd drawer [3rd CST.] 3rd drawer pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
3rd drawer feed roller [FEED ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
3rd drawer separation roller [SEP ROLLER (3rd CST.)]
4th drawer [4th CST.] 4th drawer pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
4th drawer feed roller [FEED ROLLER (4th CST.)]
4th drawer separation roller [SEP ROLLER (4th CST.)]
O-LCF feed unit [O-LCF] O-LCF pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER (O-LCF)]
O-LCF feed roller [FEED ROLLER (O-LCF)]
O-LCF separation roller [SEP ROLLER (O-LCF)]
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
(1) Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S-
2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2 : [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON [2] [START]
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON [103] [START]
Fig. 4-5
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
A. Scanner
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
A1 Original glass B or A P35-I12 *1
A2 ADF original glass B P34-I2
A3 Mirror-1 B
A4 Mirror-2 B
A5 Mirror-3 B
A6 Reflector B
A7 Lens B P34-I1
A8 Exposure lamp R C P36-I3
A9 Automatic original B C P38-I7
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet B or A R
(front and rear)
G. Drum/Cleaner
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
G1 Photoconductive drum 450/500/575/
600
G2 Whole cleaner unit B *7
G3 Drum cleaning blade 450/500/575/ P49-I9 *8
600
G4 Drum cleaning brush 450/500/575/ P48-I38 *8
600
G5 Recovery blade B R *9
G6 Separation finger for 450/500/575/ C P49-I4,I21 *10
drum 600
G7 Auger drive section W *11
G8 Cleaner lower guide B
G9 Image quality sensor B R P50-I16 *7
H. Developer unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
H1 Whole developer unit B
H2 Developer motor unit W *21
J. Transfer belt
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
J1 Transfer belt 450/500/575/ P22-I18
600
J2 Transfer belt power A R P22-I6 *15
supply roller
J3 Transfer belt drive A R P22-I9
roller
J4 Transfer belt follower A R P22-I2
roller
4
J5 Transfer belt cleaning 450/500/575/ P23-I31
blade 600
J6 Transfer belt cleaning 450/500/575/ P23-I10 *16
brush 600
J7 Flicker periphery B *16
K. Toner bag
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
K1 Toner bag 900/1000/1150/ P203-I3 *20
1200
L. Fuser unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
L1 Fuser roller 450/500/575/ P25-I14
600
L2 Pressure roller 450/500/575/ P25-I12
600
L3 Upper separation fin- 450/500/575/ P27-I22 *17
ger 600
L4 Lower separation fin- A R P27-I9
ger
L5 Cleaning web 450/500/575/ P27-I11 *18
600
L6 Web pushing roller 450/500/575/ P27-I12 *18
600
L7 Thermistor (4 pcs.) A R P27-I6,I28 *19
L8 Fuser unit entrance/ A
exit guide
L9 Web motor worm gear W
M. Exit/Reverse section
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
M1 Exit/Reversal guide A
M2 Exit roller A SI R P14- *23
I4,I19,I30
M3 Drive gear W *24
M4 Reverse section A R P13-I6,I7
transport roller
(upper, lower)
M5 Reverse section fol- A P14-I24
lower roller
(upper, lower)
M6 Horizontal transport A P20-
section transport I13,I14
roller (4 pcs.)
M7 Horizontal transport A P20-I8
section follower
roller (8 pcs.)
M8 Reverse section B or A
mylar (2pcs.)
M9 Bearing for GCB L
bushing
M10 Bearing of plastic W
bushing
M11 Paper guide B
O. LCF (MP-4004)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
O1 Pickup roller A 500 P5-I28
O2 Feed roller A 500 P4-I20
O3 Separation roller A 500 P4-I31
O4 Drive gears W
(tooth face)
O5 Brush unit B
O6 Paper path section B
P. Finisher (MJ-1027/1028)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
P1 Feed belt B P15-I2
P2 Paddle B P16-I33
A5
H6
L14,L6
H3
L7 H1,H5
L12,L1 D5
L3 D4
L13 H4
G5 D2
G2 G6
M2 L8 D1
L4 D6, D7
L2
J1 D3
M1
J2
L7 J8 C8 C9 C11 C4
J7 J6 J3 J5 J4
M4 M6 M6 C4
M6 M6 C10
M5 M7
M8 M7 M11 M7 M7
C2
C3
C1
C5
M4 C4
C2
C1 C3
M10,M9
C4
C2
C1 C3
C4
C2
C1 C3
C7
H6
L14, L6
H3
L7 H1,H5
L12, L1 D5
L3 D4
L13 H4
G5 D2
M2 G2 G6
L8 D1
L4 D6,D7
4
L2 J1 D3
M1 J2
J8 C8 C9 C11 C4
L7 M6 J7 J6 J3 J5 J4 M6
M4 M6 M6 C10
C4
M7
M5 M8 M7 M11 M7 M7
C2
C1 C3
C5
C4
M4 C2
C1 C3
M10, M9
C4
C12 C13
C14
C7
Fig. 4-7 Front side (TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND and KRD models)
H2
E3
C6 L9
L10,L11
M3
H7
K1
N6 N14
N9 N7
N15
N8
O6
O3
P2
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
Fig. 4-12
Fig. 4-13
Fig. 4-14
One-
way clutch
Idler gear
shaft
Torque
limiter
Fig. 4-15
* 5. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth face and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth faces and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 363mm).
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not twist the wire.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
Connected to earth
* 9. Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of copies if the edge of the blade get
damaged.
Fig. 4-18
Connected to earth
Fig. 4-19
Fig. 4-20
Mixer Shaft
Apply a coating of grease (Alvania No.2) to the entire periphery of the mixer shaft before attaching the
bearing.
Mixer Shaft
Bearing
Fig. 4-21
Fig. 4-22
Supply section
Fig. 4-23
Auger section
Fig. 4-24
Fig. 4-25
Blot
Fig. 4-26
Flicker
periphery
Fig. 4-27
Fig. 4-28
5. Start the PM Support mode (6S) to reset the counter of the cleaning web when the web has
been replaced, otherwise the cleaning ability of the web may be narrowed.
At the first power-ON after this counter reset, the web motor rotates for 65 seconds.
6. Turn the power of the equipment ON. Then confirm that the message "READY" has appeared
on the touch panel.
7. Perform the final check of the cleaning web (same as Step 4 above).
8. When the web motor is rotated at the output check in the Test mode (03-124), the cleaning
web may be slackened. Do not rotate the motor for more than 10 seconds to prevent the web
from being slacked.
9. It is recommended to replace all the supplies for the fuser unit at the same time. If it is neces-
sary to replace the cleaning web before it is finished for any reason, set the counters manu-
ally for the newly replaced web according to its previous usage.
Counter related to the life span control of total feeding amount of the cleaning web
Present output pages for control: 08-1252-6
Total feeding amount for control: 08-1252-7
PM support screen related counter
Cleaning web counter: 08-1252-3
Also, when replacing the web pushing roller or one-way clutch which is half-way used, set the
following counters manually.
Web pushing roller: 08-1254-0, 08-1254-3
One-way clutch: 08-1338-0, 08-1338-3
Additionally, when the present output pages for control (08-1252-6) has reached the setting
value to display that the cleaning web is consumed (08-405), the time to replace the cleaning
web appears on the screen and the feeding amount becomes small.
If the cleaning web which has exceeded its life span is used continuously, this could damage
the fuser roller. Replace the cleaning web as soon as possible when it is finished.
Belt
Pulley
E-ring
Fig. 4-29
Fig. 4-30
PM-KIT-6000 MO-KIT-6000 – 1
MA-KIT-6000 – 1
FR-KIT-6000 – 1
PM-KIT-6000C MO-KIT-6000 – 1
MA-KIT-6000 – 1
ASYS-CLAW-DRUM-C 1
Parts list
Item
Page Item
Fig. 4-31
Parts list
Grease name Part name Volume Container
Page Item
2) OPC drum
Like the toner and developer, OPC drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient tem-
perature is between 10 to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be
subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Fuser roller / Pressure roller / Cleaning web / Transfer belt / Drum cleaning brush / Transfer belt
cleaning brush 4
Avoid places where the heat rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their
fumes.
5) Copy Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
2) Handling precautions
As the drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and
removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum and separation claws
on the cleaner before installing the drum into the machine. When the drum has been replaced, reset
the drum counter in the PM Support mode (6S).
Then perform "Image quality control enforcement" in the Adjustment mode (05-290).
Notes:
• Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum, cleaning blade,
and separation fingers. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and clean-
ing blade may be damaged.
• When paper fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning effi-
ciency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt
cleaning blade
1) Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft
pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow loose thread or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaning brush and transfer belt cleaning brush
Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands.
2) Checking
- Check for stain and damage to the fuser and pressure rollers and clean or replace if necessary.
If marks made by the separation fingers have become distinct, open the fuser unit cover and
move the position of the E-ring by sliding the upper separation finger unit to the direction of the
thick arrow in the figure. The separation fingers thus contact with the different position on the
fuser roller. In case there is any scratch which may cause a printing problem or the coating of the
roller is removed, replace the roller.
E-ring
Upper separation
finger unit
Fig. 4-32
- Clean the upper/lower separation fingers and check for chipped claws.
- Check the cleaning condition of the cleaning web (kinks, lines and slacks on the cleaning web).
- Clean the thermistor and check proper contact with the fuser roller.
- Check the fused condition of the toner image.
- Check the gap between the lower entrance guide and pressure roller (do not make them touch
each other).
- Check the gap between the fuser roller and thermostat (2~2.5mm).
- Check the fuser and pressure rollers for proper rotation.
- Check the fuser and pressure rollers for bearing.
- Check the fuser roller drive gear and cleaning web drive gear
- Check the web motor lubrication to the warm gear (white molykote).
NO
Is the fuser transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[C])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the fuser transport sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or 5
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the fuser transport sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the transfer belt working?
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the transport belt is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is dis-
l connected.
l 3) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
l 6) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the drum separation finger solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-111,161)
YES
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the registration sensor is installed correctly.
l 3) Check if the registration actuator is operating properly.
l 4) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
6) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
l 7) Replace the registration sensor.
l 8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the registration motor working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-108/158)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration roller clutch is discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the registration roller clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check if there is any abnormality in the space between the registration motor and the regis-
tration roller (metal).
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
Check the condition of the registration roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or
replace it.
* If the error [E010] caused by a paper jam underneath the drum cleaner often occurs due
to an insufficient paper separation from the photoconductive drum, set a smaller value in
the code 08-841, and see what happens. At this time, however, pay attention to the
transferability at the leading edge of the paper since this transferability can be slightly
narrowed depending on the environments and conditions under which the equipment is
placed or the media type of the paper used. (Refer to 3.6.1 in this manual about the
details of the code 08-841.)
YES
Is the reverse motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-126)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse transport unit is not discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
open-circuited.
l 5
5) Replace the LGC board
YES
1) Check if the separation finger for the fuser unit is working normally.
2) Replace the LGC board
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table.)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
[E200] 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
5
[E210] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E300] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E330] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E3C0] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
(First page of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
YES Replace the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor(S18) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the registration sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor (S17) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l NO 1) Are paper dusts accumulated on the intermediate transport sensor?
l 2) Check if the harness is not damaged.
l 3) Check if the connector is disconnected.
YES
Is the transport motor (M17) rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l NO Check if the bearing of the transportation roller is locked.
l Replace the transport motor.
l 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is dis-
l connected.
l
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
l open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l 6) Replace the LGC board.
7) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working prop-
erly.
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
NO
Is the 1st drawer transport sensor (S33) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer transport sensor is discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 1st drawer transport sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the transport clutches (CLT5,7,9,11) working? 5
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches are disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN328,329,350 on the LGC board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the transport clutches.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
YES
Is the transport motor rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l NO Check if the bearing of the transportation roller is locked.
l Replace the transport motor.
l 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is dis-
l connected.
l
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
l open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l 6) Check if the conductor pattern on the transport motor driving PC
l board is short circuited or open circuited.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
l 8) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
YES
Is the 1st drawer transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer transport clutch is discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 1st drawer transport clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working prop-
erly.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l NO 1) Are paper dusts accumulated on the intermediate transport sensor?
l 2) Check if the harness is not damaged.
3) Check if the connector is disconnected.
YES
Is the transport motor rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l NO Check if the bearing of the transportation roller is locked.
l Replace the transport motor.
l 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 5
3) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is dis-
l
connected.
l
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
l open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l 6) Check if the conductor pattern on the transport motor driving PC
l board is short circuited or open circuited.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
8) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working prop-
erly.
YES
Is the reversed paper transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches are disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN328, 329, 350 on the LGC board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l opencircuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-
l
circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the transport clutches.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the conditions of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of the drawer in
use, and replace them if necessary
NO
[E260] Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
Is there any paper before the registration sensor when the bypass unit cover is opened?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the registration sensor connector is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector J341 on the LGC board is not disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
5
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short circuited
l or open circuited.
l
5) Replace the registration sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the external LCF transport motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connectors J854 on the LCF board are not discon-
l nected.
3) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
YES
YES
Leading edge of paper not reaching the fuser exit sensor.
l YES Is there any damage on the paper? (Remove the paper and check the
l followings.)
l 1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
l 2) Check the paper amount.
l 3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
l 4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A], OFF/[1]/[C], OFF/[2]/[C],
OFF/[3]/[C], OFF/[4]/[C])
l NO 1) Are paper dusts accumulated on the intermediate transport sensor?
l 2) Check if the actuator of the sensor is working normally.
l 3) Check if the harness is not damaged.
4) Check if the connector is disconnected.
YES
1) Check the conditions of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of the drawer in
use, and replace them if necessary.
2) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
3) Check the condition of the external LCF feed roller and separation roller and clean or
replace them.
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
YES
5
Are the transport clutches working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/231)
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the (lower/middle) transport clutches are
l disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329,350 on the LGC board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
l 5) Replace the (lower/middle) transport clutches.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
YES
Is the 4th drawer transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 4th drawer transport clutch is discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l
are short circuited or open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 4th drawer transport clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Clean or replace it.
NO
Is the reverse sensor-1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor-1 is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on LGC board are short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the reverse sensor-1.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the horizontal transport section driving clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the horizontal transport section driving
l clutch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected. 5
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the horizontal transport section driving clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the Mylar at the reverse section normal?
NO Replace the Mylar.
YES
Check the condition of the roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace it.
NO
Is the Horizontal transport sensor-1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[F])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the Horizontal transport sensor-1 is not dis-
l connected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short cir-
l
l cuited or open circuited.
l 5) Replace the Horizontal transport sensor-1.
l 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the transport roller 1/2 at the horizontal transport section rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/220)
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the and horizontal transport section driv-
l ing clutch-1 and horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 are not
l disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connectors of the and horizontal transport section driv-
l ing clutch-1 and and horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 are
l not misconnected (drive clutch: black-black, transport clutch 1:
l
bluepurple).
l
l 3) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l open circuited.
l 6) Replace the transport drive clutch and transport clutch 1.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
l 8) Check if the front side timing belt is put on properly.
l 9) Check the installation state of the horizontal transport section driving
clutch-1.
YES
Check the condition of the rollers at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace
them.
NO
Is the Horizontal transport sensor-2 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[G])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the Horizontal transport sensor-2 is not dis-
l connected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
l open-circuited.
l 5) Replace the Horizontal transport sensor-2.
l 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the transport roller 3/4 at the horizontal transport section rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/221)
5
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the horizontal transport section driving
l clutch-1 and horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 are not dis-
l connected.
l 2) Check if the connectors of the horizontal transport section driving
l clutch-1 and horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 are not mis-
l connected (drive clutch: black-black, transport clutch 2: blackblue)
l
3) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is not discon-
l
l nected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l open-circuited.
l 6) Replace the and horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 and and
l horizontal transport section driving clutch-2.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
l 8) Check if the front side timing belt is put on properly.
l
l
YES
Check the condition of the rollers at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace
them.
YES
Check the condition of the roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace it.
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: refer
to the following table)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if any multiple paper is fed from the drawer.
2) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the reverse sensor 1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor-1 is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the reverse sensor-1.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the reverse motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-126)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse transport unit is not discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
l open-circuited.
l 5) Replace the reverse moter.
l 6) Replace the LGC board
YES
Is the gate solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-274)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the gate solenoid is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
open-circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the gate solenoid.
l 6) Replace the LGC board
YES
1) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the exit/reversal gate.
2) Check the myler at the reverse section and clean or replace it.
YES
Is the reverse sensor- 1/2 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[D], [7]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the reverse sensor 1/2 is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
open-circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the reverse sensor- 1/2.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check the condition of the roller at the reverse section and clean or replace it.
3) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the follower roller and no abnormality at the
myler. 5
4) Check if the adjustment of the reverse motor speed (05-453/454/456) is appropriate.
5) Replace the reverse sensor-2 if it is drastically damaged.
YES
Is the exit motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-120)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN336 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
opencircuited.
l
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check if there is no abnormality and extraneous material at the guide and myler in front
of the exit roller.
3) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the exit follower roller.
YES
<Simple discharging>
Is the gate solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-274)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the gate solenoid is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l not open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
<Reversal discharging>
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check if there is no abnormality and extraneous material at the guide and myler in front
of the exit roller.
* Perform 05-447 for thick paper to increase the value by 2 to 4.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the registration sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
5
In case the paper is fed from the 2nd drawer, 3rd drawer, 4th drawer, Tandem LCF
Open the bypass unit cover. Is there any paper in front of the 1st drawer transport sensor?
l YES Remove the paper.
l * Clean or replace the feed roller and separation roller if this error
occurs frequently.
NO
Are the 1st drawer transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer transport sensor is discon-
l nected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 1st drawer transport sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it.
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the registration sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
[E110] Transport jam during duplay printing (paper not reaching registration sensor)
(First page of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
YES Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the registration sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the transport motor (M17) rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l NO Replace the transport motor. 5
l 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is dis-
l connected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l 6) Check if the conductor pattern on the transport motor driving PC
l board is short circuited or open circuited.
l 7) Replace the LGC board.
l 8) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working prop-
erly.
YES
Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l NO 1) Are paper dusts accumulated on the intermediate transport sensor?
l 2) Check if the harness is not damaged.
3) Check if the connector is disconnected.
YES
Is the transport motor rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
NO Replace the transport motor.
1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working prop-
erly.
Replace the registration roller(rubber) if not solved.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the bypass unit too narrow?
Is the paper skewed?
YES Match the width of the side guides and that of the paper.
NO
Is the bypass feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-204)
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03- 5
[FAX]OFF/[6]/[G])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed
l sensor are disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the bypass feed clutch and bypass feel sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the bypass transport roller, feed separation and separation rollers.
Clean or replace them.
NO
Is the 1st drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[D])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 1st drawer feed sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 1st drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
YES Fit the width of the original guide to that of the paper.
NO
Is the 1st drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-201)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 1st drawer feed clutch.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the 1st drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 2nd drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
YES Fit the width of the original guide to that of the paper.
NO
Is the 2nd drawer feed clutch working? 5
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-202)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 2nd drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 2nd drawer feed clutch.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the 2nd drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
NO
Is the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[D])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor
l is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN328 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l
are short circuited or open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 3rd drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
YES Fit the width of the original guide to that of the paper.
NO
Is the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch is
l disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN328 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l
are short circuited or open circuited.
l
l 5) Replace the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch.
l 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
NO
Is the 4th drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 4th drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 4th drawer feed sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 4th drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
YES Fit the width of the original guide to that of the paper.
NO 5
Is the 4th drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-228)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the 4th drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
l are short circuited or open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 4th drawer feed clutch.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the 4th drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if either of the connector J851 on the LCF board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector J850 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.
l 7) Replace the LCF board.
l 8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the external LCF transport motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector J854 on the board are not disconnected.
3) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-272)
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if any of the connector J851 on the LCF board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the connector CN346 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6) Replace the LCF feed clutch.
l 7) Replace the LCF board.
l 8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
2) Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[9]/[H])
l NO 1) Check if the connector for 24 V power supply is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the side door switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the feed cover sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN304 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
l
5) Replace the feed cover sensor.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[B])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch
l is disconnected.
l 2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board
l is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l 5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l short circuited or open circuited.
l 6) Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
l 7) Replace the LCF board.
l 8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Replace the LCF board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[E460] Right center cover (bypass feed unit cover) open jam
Is the bypass feed unit cover open?
YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the bypass feed unit cover.
NO
Is the bypass feed unit cover sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[ENERGY SAVER]OFF/[6]/[H])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed unit cover sensor is dis-
l connected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open-circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short- or open-
l
circuited.
l
5) Replace the bypass feed unit cover sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[9]/[H])
l NO 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-
l circuited.
l
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the exit cover switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[A]
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the exit cover switch is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited. 5
l 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-
l
circuited.
l
5) Replace the exit cover switch.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Note:
If any of the ADF board, original length detection sensor, read sensor, small original reverse
sensor and large original exit sensor has been replaced in an RADF-related troubleshooting,
perform “Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356)” in the
Adjustment mode. If “EEPROM initialization (05-352)” had been performed, be sure to per-
form “RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367/368)” consecutively.
NO
Is the transport force of the pickup belt, feed roller and separation roller insufficient?
YES Replace the rollers or belt.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
YES
Flatten and set it again.
YES
Replace the ADF board.
NO
Is the connector of the tray lift motor or the connector CN5 on the ADF board disconnected?
YES Reconnect the connector.
NO
Is the harness connecting the ADF board and tray lift motor open circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the connector CN12 or CN15 on the ADF board disconnected?
YES Reconnect the connector.
NO
Are the harnesses connecting the ADF board and the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor
or the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor open circuited?
5
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the ADF board.
YES
Clean the rollers.
NO
Are the small original exit flapper and small original reverse flapper operating normally?
NO
Adjust the small original exit solenoid.
[E725] Original stopping at read sensor (while its back side is being scanned)
Are the read roller and registration roller stained?
YES Clean the rollers.
NO
Replace the rollers.
NO
Is the reverse flapper working properly?
YES
NO
Adjust the reverse solenoid.
NO
Are the sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] OFF/[8]/[E], OFF/[7]/[H], OFF/[8]/[F],
OFF/[8]/[G], OFF/[8]/[H], OFF/[7]/[G], OFF/[7]/[F], OFF/[8]/[D], OFF/[8]/[C], OFF/[7]/[E])
YES Replace the ADF board.
NO
Are the connector of the sensors disconnected?
YES Connect the connector.
NO
In case of [E761],[E764],[E766],[E768], perform the automatic adjustment of RADF sensor.
In case of [E762],[E763],[E765],[E767], replace the sensor.
YES
If the RADF opening / closing switch open circuited?
YES
Adjust the RADF opening switch.
NO
Is the jam access cover sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the jam access cover sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and jam access cover opening/closing switch open
circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the jam access cover opening/closing switch working improperly?
YES Replace the cover open/close sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and RADF opening/closing switch open circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing switch working improperly?
YES Replace the RADF opening/closing switch.
NO
Is 24V supplied from the copier?
YES Replace the ADF board.
NO
Check if the power at the copier is ON.
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and RADF open/close sensor open-circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the RADF open/close sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the RADF open/close sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and APS operation sensor open-circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the APS operation sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the APS operation sensor.
5
NO
Replace the ADF board.
NO
Is the connector J1 on the punch driver PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch driver PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI3P) open circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
l NO 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
2) Replace the punch home position sensor.
YES
Replace the punch driver PC board.
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open cir-
cuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
l 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is any of the connectors J17, J24, J9 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-cir-
cuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path inlet paper sensor
(PI17) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path paper sensor
(PI14) open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling tray sensor (PI4)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery sensor (PI3) open
circuited?
YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actua-
tor.) 5
Is the buffer path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the stapling tray sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
l 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is any of the connectors J17, J24 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-cir-
cuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path inlet paper sen-
sor(PI17) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path paper sensor
(PI14) open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery sensor (PI3) open
circuited?
YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actua-
tor.)
Is the buffer path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
l 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open cir-
cuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
l 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the sta-
ples stuck in the stapling unit?
YES End
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: MS5S, front: MS7S) open-circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches 5
l securely.
2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
NO Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening
sensors (PI2S: front door opening/closing sensor, PI3S:delivery cover sensor, PI9S: inlet
cover sensor) open-circuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Are the cover opening sensors working properly?
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the cover opening sensors securely.
2) Replace the cover opening sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is any of the connectors J10, J13 and J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.1 paper sensor
(PI18S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.2 paper sensor
(PI19S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.3 paper sensor
(PI20S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and vertical path paper
sensor (PI17S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and delivery sensor
(PI11S) open-circuited?
YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is the No.1 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.2 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.3 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) 5
Is the vertical path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
l 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector J17 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-cir-
cuited?
Is either of the connectors J10 or J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.1 paper sensor
(PI18S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.2 paper sensor
(PI19S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.3 paper sensor
(PI20S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and delivery sensor
(PI11S) open-circuited?
YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.1 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.2 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.3 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
l 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-cir-
cuited?
YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l NO 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.
l 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and separation sensor open-circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the separation sensor.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and separation sensor open-circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the separation sensor.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and reverse path sensor is open-cir-
cuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the reverse path sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the reverse path sensor.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and transport sensor is open-circuited?
YES Replace the harness.
NO
Is the transport sensor working impropely?
YES Replace the transport sensor.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
NO
Are the separation sensor, reverse path sensor and transport sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the sensors.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
YES
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
YES Replace the separation sensor.
NO
Perform the width adjustment of the inserter tray side guide.
NO
1) Replace the copier LGC board.
2) Replace the IPC board.
3) Replace the inserter control board.
NO
1) Check the installation state of the cover.
2) Replace the cover switch and plate spring.
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equip-
ment side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher con-
troller PC board is open circuited.
5
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
NO Connect them properly.
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
NO Connect the harness properly.
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher discon-
nected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
NO Connect the pin or replace the harness.
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[E], /[2]/[E], /[3]/[E] ,/[4]/[E])
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN329, CN328, CN350 on the LGC board is
l disconnected.
l 3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
l open circuited.
l 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the positioning pin of the drawer is tightly screwed.
2) Check if the paper is not caught in the coupling when the tray goes up.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the 3rd drawer/tandem LCF tray-up sensor and tandem LCF bottom sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[E], /[8]/[F])
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN328, CN345 on the LGC board is discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 5
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l
l short circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the driving mechanism is abnormal.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the LCF end fence stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G], /[8]/[H])
l NO 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l 3) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l open circuited.
l 5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
l
short circuited or open circuited.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the driving mechanism is abnormal.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] OFF/[5]/[E]
l NO 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up sensor is not disconnected.
l 2) Check if the connectors J851 on the LCF board are not discon-
l nected.
l 3) Check if the actuator reaches the sensor.
l 4) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
l
not open circuited.
l
5) Replace the LCF board.
l
6) Replace the LGC board.
5
YES
1) Check if the tray lifting mechanism has no abnormality.
2) Replace the LCF board.
3) Replace the LGC board.
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN1 is disconnected and the harness is short
circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the SLG board.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the
power and check the following items.
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a
position other than home position?
l YES 1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or
l open circuited.
2) Replace the SLG board.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit
and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
(1) Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated volt-
age?)
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in "400", then press [START].
(3) Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C411/C412]).
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
(1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH control board, the LGC I/F connectors CN455 is dis-
connected?
(2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown.
(3) Replace the IH control board.
[C480] IH abnormality
1. Check the IH control board
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.
(3) Replace the IH control board.
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.
(3) Replace the IH control board.
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) Check if NVRAM is mounted.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the connector of the web motor and connector pins are not disconnected.
(2) Check if the harness at the fuser unit is not open-circuited.
(3) Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
(4) Check if the harness between the connector of the LGC board and the fuser unit is not open cir-
cuited.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Replace the fuser unit.
(1) Check if the harness connecting the ADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the ADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the ADF board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
(1) Check if the conductor pattern around IC57 and IC58 is not short- or open-circuited.
(2) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the IPC board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the harness between the LGC board and PLG board is not disconnected or open-cir-
cuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern around IC13, IC55, IC125 and CN342 on the LGC board is not
short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern around IC9, IC25, IC32 and CN204 on the PLG board is not short-
or opencircuited.
(4) Check if the connector CN103, CN104 on the SYS board is disconnected.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Replace the PLG board.
(1) Check if the connector CN102, CN103 on the SYS board is disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector CN10 on the SLG board is disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(4) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(5) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(6) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
(7) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
(8) Replace the SYS board.
(9) Replace the SLG board.
(10) Replace the LGC board.
Note:
If any of the ADF board, original length detection sensor, read sensor, small original reverse
sensor and large original exit sensor has been replaced in an RADF-related troubleshooting,
perform “Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356)” in the
Adjustment mode. If “EEPROM initialization (05-352)” had been performed, be sure to per-
form “RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367/368)” consecutively.
(1) Check the ADF board, mainly IC3, for short circuits and open circuits.
(2) Replace the ADF board.
(1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if
the reflecting mirror is dirty.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the ADF board is open circuited.
(3) Check the circuits and connectors on the ADF board, mainly IC6, IC11 and CN11 and CN15, for
short circuits and open circuits.
(4) Replace the read sensor.
(5) Replace the ADF board.
(1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the original length detection sensor and reflecting
mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the original length detection sensor and the ADF board is open
circuited.
(3) Check the circuits and connectors on the ADF board, mainly IC6, IC11 and CN15, for short cir-
cuits and open circuits.
(4) Replace the original length detection sensor.
(5) Replace the ADF board.
NO
Is the reflective mirror tainted?
YES Clean up the mirror.
NO
Is the conductor pattern around IC6, IC11 and CN16 on the ADF board short- or open-cir-
cuited?
YES Replace the ADF board.
NO
Replace the small original reverse sensor.
YES
Is the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor working properly when the lifting tray is lifted?
NO Replace the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor.
YES
Is the lifting tray lowered when originals are removed from the original tray?
l NO
l
l l NO Is the loading of the lifting tray abnormal, adjust the
l l mechanical loading. Remove, if any, extraneous
l l materials.
YES YES
1) Replace the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor.
2) Replace the ADF board.
NO
Is the reflective mirror tainted?
YES Clean up the mirror.
NO
Is the conductor pattern around IC6, IC11 and CN11 on the ADF board short circuited or
open circuited?
l YES 1) Replace the ADF board.
l 2) Perform the sensor automatical adjustment of ADF and tray width
sensor adjustment.
NO
1) Replace the large original exit sensor.
2) Perform the sensor automatical adjustment of ADF
YES
Is the deformed image output?
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the grounding wire of the high-voltage unit (e.g. developer unit, transfer unit) is
grounded securely.
3) Check if the bias contact point of the high-voltage unit is contacted securely. (Check if
the point is not stained either.)
4) Check if the metal plates of the transport system are grounded securely.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded securely?
6) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is not stopped.
7) Check if the intake area of the laser unit cooling fan is not blocked.
8) Replace the laser optical unit.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the grounding wire of the high-voltage unit (e.g. developer unit, transfer unit) is
grounded securely.
3) Check if the bias contact point of the high-voltage unit is contacted securely. (Check if
the point is not stained either.)
4) Check if the metal plates of the transport system are grounded securely.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded securely?
6) Replace the laser optical unit.
NO
1) Replace the PLG board.
2) Replace the laser optical unit.
NO
1) Replace the PLG board.
2) Replace the SYS board.
YES
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?
NO Attach it securely.
YES
Turn the feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and
down?
l NO Fix the mechanism including the shutter upper/lower bars and gears of
the feed roller-2.
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?
NO Replace the switch. 5
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Is second feed motor (M8) rotating in reverse at the fixed timing?
NO Replace second feed motor or finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?
NO Attach it securely.
YES
Turn feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and down?
l NO Fix the mechanism including the shutter upper/lower bars and gears of
the feed roller-2.
YES
Is the shutter open sensor (PI5) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) correctly pressed?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Does the voltage between J11-4 and -5 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V
when the delivery motor starts rotating?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the delivery motor and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Replace the motor.
[Procedure 2]
5
Is the tray 1 lifted/lowered?
l YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and tray 1 lifting
l motor normal?
l
NO Correct the wiring.
l
l YES
l
Replace the tray 1 lifting motor.
NO
Is the power supplied to the motor from the finisher control board at the timing of tray 1 lift-
ing?
NO Replace the finisher control board.
YES
Is there any abnormality at the tray 1 lifting mechanism?
YES Correct the defect of the mechanism.
YES
Correct the defect of the mechanism.
[Procedure 3]
Is the tray 2 home position sensor (PI25) working properly?
NO Replace the tray 2 home position sensor.
YES
Is the tray 2 lifting mechanism working properly?
NO Correct the defect of the mechanism.
[Procedure 4]
Is the tray 2 lifted/lowered?
l YES Is the harness between the finisher control board and tray 2 lifting motor
l normal?
l
NO Correct the wiring.
l
l YES
l
Replace the tray 2 lifting motor.
NO
Is the power supplied to the motor from the finisher control board at the timing of tray 2 lift-
ing?
NO Replace the finisher control board.
YES
Is there any abnormality at the tray 2 lifting mechanism?
YES Correct the defect of the mechanism.
NO
Replace the tray 2 lifting motor.
[Procedure 5]
Is the tray lifting mechanism working properly?
NO Correct the defect of the mechanism.
YES
Is the tray coming close detection switch working properly?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the alignment motor (M5S) cor-
rect?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is there any mechanical problem with the alignment guide movement path?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
END
5
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler normal?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the stapler?
YES END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M4) cor-
rect?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Try replacing the staple shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
YES END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the height sensor (PS1) correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Re-adjust the height sensor. Replace the height sensor if it still causes the problem.
[Procedure 2]
Is the connector J6 on the finisher controller PC board, J114 of the height sensor (PS1) or
relay connector J212 and J213 disconnected?
YES Connect the connector(s).
5
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Replace the height sensor.
[Procedure 3]
Is the problem solved by readjusting the DIP switch?
YES END
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor (PS1) correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Replace the height sensor.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Replace tha punch driver PC board.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is there any problem with the paper pushing plate drive mechanism?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
YES
END
[Procedure 3]
Is the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is there any problem with the pushing plate drive mechanism?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
5
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (MS7S/MS5S) on the front and rear stitchers work-
ing normally?
NO Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Are the front and rear stitchers operating at the fixed timing?
NO Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Check the wiring between the stitcher and saddle stitcher controller PC board. If there is no
problem, replace the controller PC board.
YES
Is the alignment motor (M5S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor (M5S)?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
YES
Is the guide motor (M3S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the guide motor (M3S)?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
YES
Is the paper folding motor (M2S) operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper folding motor (M2S)?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
5
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper positioning plate operating at the fixed timing?
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4S)?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-7 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Is J9-11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly connected to the ground?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) connected to the saddle stitcher
controller PC board?
NO Connect it to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Is J9-11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Is J9-14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
END 5
YES
Is the inlet cover switch (MS1S) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Measure the voltage of J10-8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board when the inlet door
is open. Is it 5V?
NO The inlet cover sensor (PI9S) is broken. Replace it.
YES
Measure the voltage between J1-1 (+) and J1-2 (-) on the saddle stitcher controller PC
board. Is it 24 V?
NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Check the wiring between J19 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle
stitcher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the saddle stitcher controller PC
board.
[Procedure 2]
Is the switch actuator for the front door working properly?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the front cover switch (MS2S) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Measure the voltage of J11-12 on the saddle switcher controller PC board when the front
door is opened. Is it 5V?
NO The front door opening/closing sensor is broken. Replace it.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Is the delivery cover switch working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Measure the voltage of J11-9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board when the delivery
door is opened. Is it 5V ?
NO The delivery cover sensor (PI3S) is broken. Replace it.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
YES Connect the wiring.
NO
Measure the voltage between J3-2 (+) and J3-1 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is it
DC 5V?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Is the swing guide open sensor (PI18) working normally?
NO Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the swing motor (M7) rotating in reverse at the fixed timing?
NO Replace the motor.
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?
NO Replace the switch.
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) correctly pressed?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 3]
Is the swing motor clock sensor (PI20) working normally?
YES
Does the voltage between J11-6 and -7 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V
when the swing motor starts rotating?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the swing motor and finisher controller PC board correct?
YES Correct the wiring.
NO
Replace the swing motor.
YES
5
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and horizontal registration home posi-
tion sensor (PI1P) correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the horizontal registration mechanism?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the horizontal registration motor (M2P)?
YES END
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor?
YES END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the punch home sensor (PI3P) and finisher controller PC board cor-
rect?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
YES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor (M1P) ?
YES END
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board?
YES END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front alignment motor (M11)
correct?
NO Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of the alignment plate?
NO Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is 5V output to CN13-5 on the inserter control board?
YES Replace the finisher control board.
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
YES
1) Replace the inserter control board.
2) Perform the inserter tray volume adjustment.
5
[CCE1] Inserter fan motor abnormality
Is the harness between the inserter control board and inserter fan normal?
NO Replace the harness.
YES
Is the conductor pattern around Q11, Q16 and CN8 on the inserter control board short cir-
cuited or open circuited?
NO Replace the inserter fan.
YES
Replace the inserter control board.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and paddle motor (M14) normal?
NO Repair the wiring.
YES
Is there any abnormality in the paddle mechanism?
NO Check the assembly and repair the paddle mechanism.
YES
Does it improve when the paddle motor (M14) is replaced?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
End
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and Knurled belt motor (M13) normal?
NO Repair the wiring.
YES
Is there any abnormality in the belt escape mechanism?
NO Check the assembly and repair the mechanism.
YES
Does it improve when the Knurled belt motor (M13) is replaced?
NO Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
End
(1) Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON?
(2) If not as in step 1, check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected correctly.
(3) If the error has still not been recovered in step 2, check if there is any defect in the LGC board,
IPC board or finisher control board. If not, replace the LGC board, IPC board or finisher control
board.
(1) Is the transport belt unit working normally? (there is no extraneous material or toner clod).
(2) Check if the connector of the transfer belt cam motor is not disconnected.
(3) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
(4) Check if the fuse on the LVPS has blown.
(5) Check if the transfer belt release detection sensor and transfer belt contact detection sensor is
working properly.
(6) Replace the transfer belt cam motor.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the circuit pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if this error occurs frequently.
(1) Check if the cleaning brush, recovery toner transport auger and recycle toner transport auger are
not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in both the toner transport sections at the
cleaner unit and recycle toner unit).
(2) Is the cleaning brush drive motor (M13) disconnected?
(3) Check if the connector (CN337) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
(4) Replace the cleaning brush drive motor and recycle toner transport motor (M8).
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the transport auger is not locked (there is no extraneous material or toner clod).
(2) Is the toner bag full detection sensor (S11) working normally?
(3) Is the used toner transport motor (M9) disconnected?
(4) Check if the connector (CN333) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
(5) Replace the used toner transport motor.
(6) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the recycle toner transport auger is not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the transport sections at the toner recycle unit). 5
(2) Is the Recycle toner transport motor (M8) disconnected?
(3) Check if the connector (CN337) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
(4) Replace the recycle toner transport motor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
NO
1) Check the connection of the KEY1 board and DSP board.
2) Check the connection of the DSP board and LGC board.
3) Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
4) Replace the LGC board.
NO
1) Replace the drum thermistor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the transport auger and paddle are not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the toner transport sections at the cleaner unit).
(2) Is the new toner transport motor disconnected?
(3) Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector Pins are not disconnected.
(4) Replace the new toner transport motor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the recycle toner transport motor is not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the toner transport sections at the recycle toner unit).
(2) Is the disconnected?
(3) Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector Pins are not disconnected.
(4) Replace the hopper motor.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press [INI-
TIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared.)
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “FRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press [INI-
TIALIZE]. (FRAM is initialized.)
Note:
When the FRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are
also initialized. Readjust them after the FRAM initialization.
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the FRAM on the
SYS board.
Note:
When the FRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are
also initialized. Readjust them after the FRAM initialization.
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the FRAM on the
SYS board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
(3) Restart the equipment.
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
5
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset and extend the “Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size” or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check that the destination address is valid and the mail server works correctly, then perform authenti-
cation again.
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Set-
ting Mode (08-666).
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of cli-
ent's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again. 5
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset and extend the “Message size limitation” or reduce the number of pages and perform the job
again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion fail-
ure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion fail-
ure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using
the Setting Mode (08-667).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,
etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,
LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
YES
Is the printout blank?
l YES Check the output of 05-205 (developer bias) and 05-210 (main charger
l grid bias). The output reference value of the developer bias is -500±22V
l and that of the main charger grid bias is -394±22V. If the output is out-
l side of the range, replace the high-voltage transformer. If it is within the
l allowance range, replace the PLG board or LGC board (See " Trouble-
l
shooting for the Image"). When the equipment is ready for printing, per-
l
form image quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
l
described later).
NO
Is the image density of the image uneven or remarkably low?
l NO 1) Perform the test print (04-113) again. If the printout is blank, return to
l the previous step " Is the printout blank?".
l 2) If the test print is normal, check the surface of the image quality sen-
l sor, clean it or replace it, and then perform the image quality control
l enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
YES
YES
Is developer material in the developer remarkably low or any foreign matter in the devel-
oper?
l YES Replace the developer material and the developer unit if needed. When
l the normal images is able to be output, perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the main charger wrongly installed or the main charger grid stained?
l YES Install the main charger properly. Clean the main charger grid. If the
l main charger grid is damaged, replace it. When the normal image is
l able to be output, perform image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
NO
Is there any stain or dent on the surface of the photoconductive drum?
l YES Clean the photoconductive drum or replace it. Replace the cleaner unit
l and developer unit if needed. When the normal image is able to be out-
l put, perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check
(image check; described later).
NO
Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
Replace the laser unit, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check
(image check; described later).
Replace the HVT board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
NO 5
Is the image quality sensor wrongly installed to the cleaner?
l YES Install the image quality sensor to the cleaner unit properly, and perform
l the image quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
described later).
NO
Is the surface of the image quality sensor stained?
l YES Clean the surface of the image quality sensor. Replace it if necessary,
l and then perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, connector of the LGC board CN337, CN342 or
connector of the SYS board CN103 disconnected?
l YES Plug the connector again, and then perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, the LGC board and
the SYS board or LGC board and the switching power supply open-circuited?
l YES Replace the open-circuited harness, and then perform the image quality
control enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the power voltage for the 12V power normal?
YES
Is the value for the image quality sensor output value (Light source off) 05-292 outside the
range between 50 and 230?
Is the value for the image quality sensor light amount adjustment result 05-296 "0 "or "255"?
Is the value for the image quality sensor light amount adjustment result 05-296 other than "0
"or "255"?
Is the power voltage output (Vout2) that is created in the sensor outside the range?
l YES 1) Is toner adhered to the connector that connects the cleaner unit and
l this equipment and the connector almost short-circuited or discon-
l nected? Replace the harness if needed, and then perform the image
l quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
l described later).
l
2) Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control
l
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
l
l 3) Replace the image quality sensor, and perform the image quality
control enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" and clear the problem.
• Is the value for 05-291 "1"?
Attempt the procedure again from the beginning.
• Is the value for 05-291 "2"?
Pattern abnormality. Go back to "(1) Pattern abnormality " and clear the problem.
• Is the value for 05-291 "4"?
Sensor abnormality. Go back to "(2) Sensor abnormality" and clear the problem.
* When the value for 05-242 (Drum surface potential sensor control status) is other than
"0", there is a problem on the drum surface potential control. Clear the problem with the
troubleshooting for surface potential control related.
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" and clear the problem.
• Is the value for 05-291 "1"?
Attempt the procedure again from the beginning.
• Is the value for 05-291 "2"?
Pattern abnormality. Go back to "(1) Pattern abnormality " and clear the problem.
• Is the value for 05-291 "4"?
Sensor abnormality. Go back to "(2) Sensor abnormality" and clear the problem.
* When the value for 05-242 (Drum surface potential sensor control status) is other than
"0", there is a problem on the drum surface potential control. Clear the problem with the
troubleshooting for surface potential control related. 5
NO
Is the connector of LGC board CN337, CN342 or that of SYS board CN103 disconnected?
l YES Connect them properly again, and perform drum surface potential sen-
sor control / condition check (described later).
NO
Is the main charger wrongly installed?
Are the main charger grid/wire wrongly installed?
Is the charger leakage, etc. occurring?
l YES Remove the dusts or toner stains if any, and then install them properly.
l Perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition check
(described later)
NO
Check the value for 05-244. Is the value for 05-244 within the range between 400 and 800?
l NO 1) Perform the charging transformer output (05-210) and check that the
l value is within the range of -500±12V. If the voltage is outside the
l range, replace the HVT board and perform the drum surface poten-
l tial sensor control / condition check (described later).
l 2) When the charging transformer output is within the range of -
l 500±12V, replace the drum surface potential sensor, and perform the
l
drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described
l
l later).
l 3) If the problem still occurs, replace the LGC board, and perform the
l drum surface potential sensor control/condition check (described
l later).
YES
YES
Replace the LGC board and perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition
check (described later).
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" to clear the problem.
• When a message notifying the toner cartridge needs to be replaced is displayed and the cartridge is
replaced accordingly, but the message remains displayed
• When a message notifying the toner cartridge needs to be replaced is displayed and the equipment
simultaneously stops its operation during the process of a job (The equipment should keep its oper-
ation for a while even if such message is displayed.)
• The Auto Supply Order function does not work.
Countermeasure
1) Check if the connector or connector pins on the toner drive are disconnected.
2) Replace the remaining toner detection sensor.
Fig. 5-1
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-2
Note:
1. Toner density correcting method
Change the setting value 'Toner density life correction setting (08-414)' (6 is the default setting.)
0: Appox. 0.75% lower than the current value
1: Appox. 0.50% lower than the current value
2: Appox. 0.25% lower than the current value
3: The current value (Default setting)
4: Appox. 0.15% higher than the current value
5: Appox. 0.25% higher than the current value
6: Appox. 0.50% higher than the current value
7: Appox. 0.75% higher than the current value
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-3
Moire
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for
value eters. sharpness.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-113). When defects occur, perform the cor-
responding troubleshooting proce-
dure.
Lack of sharpness
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for
value eters. sharpness.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-113). When defects occur, perform the cor-
responding troubleshooting proce-
dure.
4 Check the image processing param- Check the encircled areas A and B in
eters. the image, and change the sharp-
ness intensity in the sharpness
adjustment mode.
Approx.188mm
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-4
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 188 mm toward the dark image.) 5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Fuser unit 2 Is the pressure of the fuser roller nor- Check the pressure releasing parts
mal? and pressurization mechanism.
3 Is the thermistor in contact with the Contact the thermistor with the fuser
fuser roller? roller.
5 Has the fuser roller reached its PM Replace the fuser roller.
life?
6 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the adjustment values of fuser
roller normal? roller temperature?
08-410, 411
Fuser unit 7 Using the specified fuser roller and Use the specified fuser roller and the
the pressure roller? pressure roller.
9 Is the cleaning web transported nor- Check the drive system of the clean-
mally? ing web. Check and correct setting
(08-403, 1252-6 1252-7)
10 Has the cleaning web reached its PM Replace the cleaning web.
life?
11 Using the specified cleaning web? Use the specified cleaning web.
12 Is there any trouble with the ther- Clean or replace the thermistor.
mistor?
Paper 13 Has the appropriate paper type been Select a proper mode.
selected?
14 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? 08-410, 412, 413, 437, 1804
Developer material/Toner 16 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material
rial and toner? and toner.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-5
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Paper 1 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp? damp place.
Drum 3 Is the drum surface wet or dirty? Wipe the drum with a piece of dry
cloth.
* Do not use alcohol or other
organic solvents.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-6
Pressure between fuser 3 Are the pressure springs working Check and adjust the pressure
roller and pressure roller properly? springs.
Fuser roller temperature 4 Is the temperature of the fuser roller Check the setting and correct it.
normal? 08-410, 411
Developer material/Toner 5 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material
rial and toner? and toner.
Thermistor 6 Is there any problem with the ther- Clean or replace the thermistor..
mistor?
Paper 7 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Avoid storing paper in damp place.
damp?
8 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or
mode? select the proper mode.
9 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? 08-410, 412, 413, 437, 1804
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-7
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-8
Exposure lamp and 1 Does the exposure lamp light? Check if the connector contacts with
inverter the exposure lamp terminal.
Replace the defective inverter.
Bedewed scanner and 3 Is the scanner or drum bedewed? Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
drum Keep the power cord plugged in all
trough the day and night.
(For the model with damp heater)
5 Is the main charger wire broken? Replace the main charger wire.
CCD, SLG, SYS, LGC 8 Are the connectors securely con- Connect the connectors securely.
boards and harnesses nected? Replace the harness.
Check if the harnesses connecting
the boards are open circuited.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-9
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-10
Main charger 1 Is there a foreign matter on the Remove the foreign matter.
charger?
Discharge LED 4 Does the discharge LED light nor- Replace the discharge LED or check
mally? the harness and the circuit.
Developer unit 5 Is the developer sleeve rotating nor- Check the drive system of the devel-
mally? oper unit, or clean the sleeve sur-
Is there any abnormality on the face.
sleeve surface?
Drive system 6 Are the drum and scanner jittering? Check each drive system.
Feed system 9 Is the aligning amount proper? Adjust the aligning amount.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-11
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Drawers 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly Install the drawer or LCF properly.
LCF installed?
2 Is there too much paper in the drawer The height of paper stack should not
or LCF? exceed 55 mm.
137 mm or lower/room for tandem
LCF.
428 mm or lower for external LCF.
3 Is the corner of the paper folded? Change the direction of the paper
and set it again.
4 Are the side guides of the drawer or Adjust the position of the side guides.
LCF properly installed?
Feed roller 5 Is the surface of the feed roller dirty? Clean the feed roller surface with
alcohol, or replace the roller.
Rollers 6 Are the roller and shaft secured? Check and tighten the E-rings, pins,
clips and setscrews.
Alligning amount 7 Is the aligning amount proper? Increase the aligning amount.
Registration roller 8 Is the spring detached from the regis- Attach the spring correctly. Clean the
tration roller? roller if it is dirty.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-12
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-13
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Drum 4 Is there a deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum if the scratch has
surface? reached the aluminum base.
Scanner 5 Is there a foreign matter on the car- Remove the foreign matter.
riage rail?
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-14
Toner empty 1 Is the toner supply symbol lighting? Replace the toner cartridge.
2 Is the toner cartridge installed prop- Check the installation state of the
erly? toner cartridge.
3 Is the performance of the new toner Check the performance of the new
supply motor normal? toner supply motor.
Decreasing toner density 5 Is the Auto-toner sensor connected Check the connection of the connec-
correctly? tor of the Auto-toner sensor.
Developer material/Toner/ 7 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material,
Photoconductive drum rial, toner and photoconductive toner and photoconductive drum.
drum?
8 Have the developer material and the Replace the developer material and
photoconductive drum reached their photoconductive drum.
PM life?
9 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in the
toner cartridge 35°c or less without environment within specification.
dew?
10 Is there any dent on the surface of Replace the drum.
the photoconductive drum?
11 Is there any film forming on the pho- Clean or replace the drum.
toconductive drum?
Main charger output 14 Is the setting value proper? Replace the high-voltage transformer
Is the main charger output normal? with a new one and print out a test
chart.
If any abnormal image appears,
check the harness connection
between the LGC board and the
high-voltage transformer, power sup-
ply and stain on the main charger
wire.
Developer bias output 15 Is the setting value proper? Replace the high-voltage transformer
Is the developer bias output normal? with a new one and print out a test
chart.
If any abnormal image appears,
check the harness connection
between the LGC board and the
high-voltage transformer, power sup-
ply and stain on the main charger
wire.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-15
Transfer belt unit 1 Is the surface of the transfer belt sup- Clean it with alcohol.
ply roller dirty with toner?
Paper 2 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF/ Reinsert the paper with the reverse
PFP curled? side up or change the paper.
3 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF Avoid storing paper in damp place.
damp?
Registration roller 6 Is there any abnormality related to Clean the roller if it is dirty. Securely
the registration roller or with the roller attach the springs if they are
itself? detached. Replace the clutch if it is
defective. Adjust the rotation speed
of the roller.
Note:
Refer to 3.6.1 of chapter 3 for the poor image transfer at the paper leading edge.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-16
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Main charger 1 Is the main charger dirty? Clean or replace the main charger
grid.
Transfer belt unit 2 Is the surface of the transfer belt sup- Clean it with alcohol.
ply roller dirty with toner?
Laser optical unit 3 Is there any foreign matter or stain on Remove the foreign matter or stain.
the 2 slit glasses?
Discharge LED 4 Are the connectors of discharge LED Reconnect the harness securely.
harness securely connected?
Developer unit 7 Is the developer material transported Remove foreign matters if there is
normally? any.
Scanner section 8 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.
position of shading correction plate),
mirror and lens dirty?
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-17
Developer material/Toner/ 1 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material,
Photoconductive drum rial, toner and photoconductive toner and photoconductive drum.
drum?
2 Have the developer material and the Replace the developer material and
photoconductive drum reached their photoconductive drum.
PM life?
3 Is there any film forming on the pho- Clean or replace the drum.
toconductive drum?
Toner Cartridge 4 Is the toner supply symbol lighting? Replace the toner cartridge.
5 Is the toner cartridge installed prop- Check the installation state of the
erly? toner cartridge, install it securely.
6 Is the performance of the new toner Check the performance of the new
supply motor normal? toner supply motor.
Main charger output 8 Is the setting value proper? Replace the high-voltage transformer
Is the main charger output normal? with a new one and print out a test
chart.
If any abnormal image appears,
check the harness connection
between the LGC board and the
high-voltage transformer, power sup-
ply and stain on the main charger
wire.
Developer bias output 9 Is the setting value proper? Replace the high-voltage transformer
Is the developer bias output normal? with a new one and print out a test
chart.
If any abnormal image appears,
check the harness connection
between the LGC board and the
high-voltage transformer, power sup-
ply and stain on the main charger
wire.
Decreasing toner density 10 Is the Auto-toner sensor connected Check the connection of the connec-
correctly? tor of the Auto-toner sensor.
Image quality sensor/ Sur- 12 Are the image quality sensor and the Check the performance of the image
face potential sensor surface potential sensor normal? quality sensor and the surface poten-
tial sensor. (See the trouble shooting
related with the image quality con-
trol.)
Note:
1. Toner density correcting method 5
Change the setting value 'Toner density life correction setting (08-414)' (6 is the default setting.)
0: Appox. 0.75% lower than the current value
1: Appox. 0.50% lower than the current value
2: Appox. 0.25% lower than the current value
3: The current value (Default setting)
4: Appox. 0.15% higher than the current value
5: Appox. 0.25% higher than the current value
6: Appox. 0.50% higher than the current value
7: Appox. 0.75% higher than the current value
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-18
Scanner/Printer adjust- 1 Have the printed images been dislo- Adjust the position of the leading
ment cated in the same manner? edge of paper in the Adjustment
Mode.
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty, or the Clean the registration roller with alco-
spring detached? hol.
Securely attach the springs.
3 Is the registration roller working prop- Adjust or replace the gears if they are
erly? not engaged properly.
Feed clutch 4 Is the feed clutch working properly? Check the circuit or feed clutch, and
replace them if necessary.
Pre-registration guide 5 Is the pre-registration guide installed Install the guide properly.
properly?
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-19
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
- 1 Is the toner image on the drum nor- If normal, perform steps 2 to 4. Per-
mal? form step 5 and followings in case
the image is abnormal.
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller rotating nor- Check the registration roller area and
mally? springs for installation condition.
Fuser roller and pressure 3 Are the fuser roller and pressure Check the fuser roller area.
roller roller rotating normally? Replace the rollers if necessary.
Operation of carriage 5 Is there any problem with the slide Replace the slide sheet.
sheet?
6 Is there any problem with the car- Replace the carriage foot.
riage foot?
8 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the car-
system of the carriage? riage.
Drum drive system 10 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the drum.
system of the drum? Clean or replace the gears if they
have stains or scratches.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-20
Developer material/Toner/ 1 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material,
Photoconductive drum rial, toner and photoconductive toner and photoconductive drum.
drum?
Dram cleaning brush 2 Is the cleaning brush damaged or Replace the cleaning brush.
has it reached its PM life?
Fuser unit 3 Are there bubble-like scratches on Replace the fuser roller.
the fuser roller (188mm pitch on the Check and adjust the temperature
printed image)? control circuit.
5 Is the temperature of the fuser roller Check the adjustment value of fuser
normal? roller temperature.
(08-410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 1804)
8 Using the specified cleaning web? Use the specified cleaning web.
Drum cleaning blade 9 Is the drum cleaning blade in proper Check the cleaning blade and
contact with the drum? replace it if it does not contact with
the cleaning blade properly.
10 Has the drum cleaning blade been Replace the drum cleaning blade.
turned up? Check and replace the drum if neces-
sary.
Toner recovery auger 11 Is the toner recovered normally? Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the pressure of the cleaning
blade.
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-21
5
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Original glass 1 Is the original glass dirty? Clean the original glass.
Main charger 2 Are the needle electrode, main Clean or replace them.
charger grid and main charger case
dirty?
Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean the discharge LED.
Exposure lamp 6 Is the exposure lamp discolored or Replace the exposure lamp.
degraded?
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-22
Paper 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its Check the paper type and mode.
mode?
Transfer belt unit 3 Is the surface of the transfer belt sup- Clean it with alcohol.
ply roller dirty with toner?
4 Does the transfer belt exceed its nor- Replace the transfer belt.
mal life span?
High-voltage transformer 5 Is the output from the high-voltage Adjust the output. Replace the trans-
(Transfer charger) transformer normal? former if necessary.
[A] Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibility
and the measure of the backup.
(5) Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to the client
computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
(6) Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to the
paper run-out and jam, etc.)
Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be kept.)
(9) Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)
The data cannot be backed up.
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
(3) Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3) Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
(1) Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON.
When “Firmware Version Up Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] but-
ton.
[F] Ask users to reset the user's setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
(5) When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with "Create self-certif-
icate" of TopAccess.
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address
(6) When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with "Install Certificate for Wireless LAN" of TopAccess.
CA certificate
User certificate
[G] Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, per-
form the re-setting.
(1) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the pro-
cedure of (2).)
5
(2) While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
(3) Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
[H] Referring to the “FUNCTION” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
(2) Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3) Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
(1) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2) Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3) Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See P.6-1 "6. FIRMWARE UPDATING" for the details of System ROM update.
(4) Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(5) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of set-
tings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
• When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(8) Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the num-
ber on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995.
* If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (14).
(15) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
• Check that the percentage is 100% and “HDD Erase [OK]” appears on the upper left of the screen.
• Check that the version (SYS V1.0) is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
* When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased.
(3) Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incor-
rect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(5) Perform “1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter” of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total
counter.
(9) Set the destination with 08-701 (Destination setting of FAX machine).
(14) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer Model name HDD serial number
3) ID=05 and c5
ID Name Description Remarks
05 Re-allocated Sector Count The number of sectors reassigned This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to This value tends to increase at
be reassigned HDD failure.
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance dur-
ing normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads.
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallo-
cation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrect-
able sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate) This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
2) The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to “Enabled”.
- The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNC-
TIONS] → [ADMIN] → [WIRELESS LAN] → [SETTING CHECK].
Confirm the settings with the administrator.
* “NIC INITIALIZING” does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it dis-
appears after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the
Wireless LAN did not succeed even though “NIC INITIALIZING” disappears.
* The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is
not found or security settings are not correct.
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.
Download jig
Firmware Stored
Individual update Batch update
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P.6-5 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) <Master data>"
P.6-11 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) <System ROM / Engine ROM / Scanner ROM /
Laser ROM / PFC ROM>"
P.6-28 "6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320"
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P.6-26 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector Mark for ROM LED
installation direction
ROM
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
Fig. 6-3
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN107) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-4
Fig. 6-5
(6) “Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
Fig. 6-6
Fig. 6-7
(7) Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig.
6
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
Cover plate
Fig. 6-8
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN107) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-9
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-10
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-11
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
• Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
• Select items as follows to update it individually.
Items
Types of Firmware <Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software version to be
updated.>
“V1.03/8.30” or earlier “V1.04/2.38” or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
1. UI Update
2. System Firmware Update
Laser ROM 3. LSR Firmware Update 2. LSR Firmware Update
PFC ROM 4. PFC Firmware Update 3. PFC Firmware Update
Engine ROM 5. Engine Firmware Update 4. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 6. Scanner Firmware Update 5. Scanner Firmware Update
Fig. 6-12
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-13
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-14
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-15
Status display during update Status display when update is completed
OS UI Update ....... OS UI Update ....... Completed
LSR Update ....... Flash Update LSR Update ....... Completed
PFC Update ....... PFC Update ....... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update Engine MAIN Update .. Completed
Scanner Firm Update .. Flash Update Scanner Firm Update .. Completed
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-16
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-17
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Fig. 6-18
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-19
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate.
[PFC ROM]
[Engine ROM]
Update Completed
6
Fig. 6-20
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
[PFC ROM]
[Engine ROM]
Update Completed
6
Fig. 6-21
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-22
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
File Name
Rotary Switch System, Engine, Flash ROM
Master Data
Scanner, Laser and PFC data
1 hdos.bin firmImage0.bin ROM1
2 1 firmImage1.bin ROM2
3 2 firmImage2.bin ROM3
4 3 N/A ROM4
5 4 N/A ROM5
6 N/A N/A ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-25
(4) Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (Engine ROM: CN324, PFC ROM: CN325) on
the LGC board (ROM attached side upward).
6
Jig connector for
PFC ROM
Fig. 6-26
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
Fig. 6-27
Fig. 6-28
Cover plate
Fig. 6-29
(6) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN6) on the scanning section control PC board
(SLG board).
Connector
Fig. 6-30
(8) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(9) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate, the right upper cover
and the top right cover.
(5) Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (J213) on the PLG board (ROM attached side
upward).
Jig connector
Fig. 6-31
(7) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
(3) Take off the connector cover on the ADF rear cover.
(4) Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (J3) on the ADF board (ROM attached side
upward).
Jig connector
Fig. 6-32
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. 6
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
(3) To update the finisher firmware, take off the finisher rear cover. To update the saddle stitcher firm-
ware, take off the saddle stitcher PCB cover.
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector of the finisher control PC board or saddle stitcher
control PC board.
Download jig
Download jig
[Finisher] [Saddle stitcher]
Fig. 6-33
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(10) Install the finisher rear cover and the saddle stitcher PCB cover.
(3) Connect the inserter to the equipment after the inserter rear cover removed.
* At this time, do not connect the finisher interface cable to the inserter.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector of the inserter main board (ROM attached side to
the left).
Jig connector
Fig. 6-34
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed, or LED flashes fast. In this case, turn OFF the
power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the
beginning.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-35
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig. 6-36
(5) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts
automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate.
(8) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (8), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.
Model specific
Firmware Stored Data file name
folder name
Master data Hard disk 1, 2, 3 ... n
* The file name should be consecu-
tive numbers from 1 to “n” without
file extension. The capacity of
each file is approx. 8 MB. How-
ever, the file capacity of “n” (last
number) may be less than 8 MB.
520_850
System ROM System control PC board firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
(SYS board)
* The system firmware is stored
into the hard disk from the FROM
basic section software version
“V1.04/2.38”.
Engine ROM Logic PC board firmImage2.bin
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)
Laser ROM Laser control PC board (PLG board)
6
PFC ROM Logic PC board (LGC board)
• The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
• Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
• Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
• The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-
teed.
mentusb.o
520_850
dlFirmWare_520_850
firmImage0.bin
firmImage1.bin
firmImage2.bin
1
2
3
:
Fig. 6-37
Important:
• The "mentusb.o" file stored in the root of the USB storage device is a common file in e-
STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO452 Series and e-STUDIO282 Series. To save the firmware
of more than one model into one USB storage device, one "mentusb.o" file stored in the root 6
of USB storage device is sufficient.
• Be careful not to mix up the "mentusb.o" file because there is a file whose name is the same
in the localization tool.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
• Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data ( P.6-39
"6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-38
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Fig. 6-39
(5) Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
When the update program is used, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-40
After the update program is finished being loaded, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-41
6
Note:
If the "dlFirmWare_520_850" file of the update program is not stored in the USB storage device
though "mentusb.o" file exists, or the loading of the update program fails, the following screen
appears. In this case, check if the update program is correctly stored and repeat step (5) and
after.
Fig. 6-42
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-43
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
0. OS Update firmImage0.bin is written.
1. HDD Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update firmImage0.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
4. LSR Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
5. PFC Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
6. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
7. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
Fig. 6-44
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
1. OS UI Update firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin are written.
2. HDD SYS Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
3. LSR Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
4. PFC Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
5. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written..
6. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
6
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or turn OFF the
power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Fig. 6-45
Fig. 6-46
If an attempt to update the FROM basic section software "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier version to the
latest firmware version without the update program, the following screen appears. In this case,
store "mentusb.o" and "dlFirmWare_520_850", which are the files for update program, in the
specified folder and repeat step (5) and after.
Fig. 6-47
Items
Types of Firmware <Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software version of
the equipment>
“1.03 / 8.30” or earlier “1.04 / 2.38” or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
(OS data)
System ROM 2. UI Data Update
(UI data)
Master data 1. HDD Update 2. HDD SYS Update
System ROM 3. System Firmware Update
(System firmwar)
Laser ROM 4. LSR Firmware Update 3. LSR Firmware Update
PFC ROM 5. PFC Firmware Update 4. PFC Firmware Update
Engine ROM 6. Engine Firmware Update 5. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 7. Scanner Firmware Update 6. Scanner Firmware Update
Fig. 6-48
Fig. 6-49
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-50
Fig. 6-51
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.03 / 8.30" or earlier:
Fig. 6-52
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-53
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating ( P.6-39 "6.2
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device")?
• Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
Fig. 6-54
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.04 / 2.38" or later:
Fig. 6-55
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
[PFC ROM]
[Engine ROM]
Update Completed
Fig. 6-56
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update. Note that the screen order may
be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed in the process.
* If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
[PFC ROM]
4. PFC Firmware
Update
[Engine ROM]
5. Engine Firmware
Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-57 6
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is necessary to
format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in the HDD
with this function.
Notes:
• When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
• Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
6
• The following screen is displayed.
Fig. 6-58
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
(1) +3.3 V
+3.3VA : CN405 Pins 19 and 20
Output to the SYS board
+3.3VB : CN407 Pin 5
Output to the PLG board
+3.3VC : CN408 Pin 1
Output to the SLG board
+3.3VD : CN406 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
(2) +5.1 V
+5.1VA : CN405 Pins 15 and 16
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VB : CN405 Pin 14
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VC : CN406 Pin 2
Output to the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board),
IPC board (finisher: via LGC board)
+5.1VD : CN408 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the SLG board
+5.1V E : CN407 Pin 1
Output to the PLG board
+5.1VF : CN407 Pin 2
Output to the PLG board
+5.1V G : CN409 Pin 1
Output to the finisher
(3) +12 V
+12VA : CN405 Pins 4 and 5 7
Output to the SYS board
+12VB : CN405 Pins 3 and 7
Output to the SYS board
+12VC : CN407 Pin 6
Output to the PLG board
+12VD : CN408 Pin 7
Output to the SLG board
+12VE : CN406 Pin 6
Output to the LGC board
+12VF : CN410 Pin 1
Output to the FAX board
The following are 3 output channels for the cover switch line.
(1) +5.1 V
+5.1VH : CN403 Pin 5
Output to the PLG board
(3) +36 V
+36VA : CN402 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
+36VB : CN402 Pin 8
Output to the LGC board
+36VC : CN403 Pin 3
Output to the PLG board
+36VD : CN404 Pin 1
Output to the SLG board
Switching regulator
Main switch CN401
NEUTRAL 1 PWR-DN CN405 SYS board
Noise Noise
filter filter CN406 LGC board
LIVE 4
F2 CN407 PLG board
Breaker CN408 SLG board
Regulator
IPC board (Finisher: via LGC board)
+5.1VD CN408 SLG board
+5.1VE CN407 PLG board
+5.1VF CN407 PLG board
+5.1VG CN409 Finisher
7-5
+12VF CN410 FAX board
Fig. 7-1
3 +5.1VH CN403 PLG board
Noise
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
6
filter F3
F1 +24VB CN405 SYS board
Cover interlock switch
+24VC CN407 PLG board
Harmonic F4
+24VA CN402 LGC board
reactor +24VD CN403 PLG board
+24VE CN404 SLG board
CN1 F5
Switching regulator 1 +24VF CN409 Finisher
Regulator
cooling fan-1 2 F6
+24VG CN404 ADF board (RADF)
F7
+36VA CN402 LGC board
+36VB CN402 LGC board
+36VC CN403 PLG board
+36VD CN404 SLG board
CN2
Switching regulator 1
cooling fan-2 2 PWRFN-0A CN402 LGC board
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 © 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7-6
8. REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.
2) Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
8.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.
1) Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
- FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
2) Order Intervals
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the spec-
ified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner con-
tainer full detection.
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
- Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-MAIL E-mail address of supplier (*3)
CUSTOMER Customer information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER Supplier information
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN Service technician information
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when “FAX” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when “MAIL” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
*1 The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
*1 When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is not
sent.
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to “0”.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
Fig. 8-1
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 8-2
Fig. 8-3
Fig. 8-4
Fig. 8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] ---
Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
Fig. 8-6
CUSTOMER
[NAME] --- Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS] --- Input the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME] --- Input the name of supplier.
[ADDRESS] --- Input the address of supplier.
Fig. 8-7
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] --- Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME] --- Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]--- Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
Fig. 8-8
Fig. 8-9
Fig. 8-10
Fig. 8-11
[CONDITION] ---
The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number specified for the CON-
DITION.
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF]--- Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
Fig. 8-12
(27) Press the [USER TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED
TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
Fig. 8-13
1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999
Fig. 8-14
Fig. 8-15
3) Result list
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999
Fig. 8-16
8.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
• PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2 Setting
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are avail-
able. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 8-17
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.
Fig. 8-18
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig. 8-19
Fig. 8-20
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.
• When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig. 8-21
• Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig. 8-22
Fig. 8-23
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.
The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
• Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
• Notify Date 1
• Notify Date 2
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
Fig. 8-24
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [SET]
button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
Fig. 8-25
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute
column of "Time" and press the [SET] button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
After all the settings are completed, press the [ENTER] button. The display returns to the screen
in step (5).
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Fig. 8-26
3 Serial number
5 Supplier information
6 Customer information
25 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
Sheet 2
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
Fig. 8-27
3 Serial number
5 Customer information
7 Supplier information
25 History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
8 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
9 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
8
Fig. 8-28
3 Serial number
6 Error code
8 Supplier information
9 Customer information
11 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
Important:
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
• The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data clon-
ing operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Imple-
menters Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only)
* Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were origi-
nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
• The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equiv-
alent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
• Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is differ-
ent, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
• If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter val-
ues are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied. 9
• Before starting data cloning, check that “Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage
device (08-9889)” is set at "0" (Accepted). If this is set at "1" (Not accepted), data cloning is
disabled. In this case, ask the administrator to enable it on the TopAccess menu.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
• Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Fig. 9-1
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1050/1051), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040/2041) and scanner kit
(GM-4010) are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
(5) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-3
Fig. 9-4
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-5
Fig. 9-6
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-7
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-8
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-9
Fig. 9-10
Fig. 9-11
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-12
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-13
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-14
Fig. 9-15
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
Fig. 9-16
Fig. 9-17
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(2) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Fig. 9-18
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1050/1051), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040/2041) and scanner kit
(GM-4010) are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from
the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-19
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-20
Fig. 9-21
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-22
Fig. 9-23
(8) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-24
(9) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not cop-
ied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] → [ADMIN] → Enter the password → 9
[COUNTER] → [DEPARTMENT SETTING] → Enter the password → [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-25
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-26
(13) Press the [4] button.
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-27
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)
Fig. 9-28
Fig. 9-29
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-30
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-31
(20) Press the [6] button.
The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-32
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
Fig. 9-33
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-34
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
Fig. 9-35
* In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item File name
User data user_data.txt
Setting item data setting_data.txt
SRAM data sram_data.txt
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
Brown Brown
J L
10.1 AC Wire Harness
Black
1 2 Fuser
J652 Fuser roller Fuser roller
1 2
White center thermostat side thermostat
White
Blue
Fuser roller
Brown
N NEUTRAL White 1 3
G Noise
Side Center IH coil Side
L LIVE Black Black 2 Filter 4
IH coil IH coil
Blue
Black
White
Brown
20A
FG 1 2 4 3
J523
1 2 4 3 CN452 CN453 CN454
C S G
J645
06/09
10 - 1
Blue White
White
Blue
4 4 IH board
Brown
Fig. 10-1
CN607 CN450 CN451 J608
Brown Black IH coil control
1 1 1 L N 1
circuit
White
J32
Brown
Brown
CN8
SE_VCC
1
SE_VOUT J517 J635 CN338
PWA-F-KEY2 PWA-F-KEY1 2 SG
SE_GND SFB- 3 A1 A16 A1
(KEY2) (KEY1) 3 SFCOV-1A PWA-F-LGC
SE_TOUT COV-SNR 2 A2 A15 A2
A 4 (S25) +5.1VC (LGC) A
1 A3 A14 A3
J599
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ATSSW-1
CN6
4
3
2
1
CN1
1 6 A4 A13 A4
CN4-2
ATSVR-1A
CN5-2A
CN5-2B
2 5 A5 A12 A5
+24VB
SG
DQ4
DQ5
VDD
DM0
DQ6
DQ7
SG
NC
NC
NC
VDD
DQ14
DQ13
DM1
VDD
DQ14
DQ15
CKE1
VDD
NC
DQ20
A12
SG
DQ21
A11
DM2
VDD
DQ22
A8
DQ23
SG
A6
DQ28
DQ29
VDD
DM3
A3
DQ30
SG
DQ31
CB4
CB5
VDD
CK0
/CK0
SG
DMB
A10
CB6
VDD
CB7
SG
DQ36
DQ37
VDD
DM4
DQ38
DQ39
SG
DQ44
/RAS
DQ45
VDD
/CS0
/CS1
DMS
SG
DQ46
DQ47
NC
VDD
DQS2
DQS3
NC
VDD
DM6
DQS4
DQS5
VDD
NC
DQ60
DQ61
SG
DM7
DQ62
DQ63
VDD
SA0
SA1
SA2
VDD-SPD
TEMP/HUMI-SNR ATTRN-SNR 3 4 A6 A11 A6
(S7) (S12) ATS-1A
4 3 A7 A10 A7 J554 CN331 CN327 J513 J515
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
SG PUTRM-0A +24VC
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
INV_GND
5 2 A8 A9 A8 CN336 CST-TRY-MOT1 2 2 A1 A1 12 1 2 2 SFB-SOL
INV_CONT
INV_VDD5V
SG +24VB PUTRM-1A SFBSL-0A
CN109
6 1 A9 A8 A9 1 6
M (M21) 1 1 A2 A2 11 2 1 1 (SOL3)
+24VB
INV_VDD5V
INV_GND
OUTP4PW
OUTP3PW
COM2PW
RET8
RET7
RET6
SCN4
LW
MID
UP
INV_CONT
FG
SG
RET8
RET7
RET6
RET5
RET4
RET3
RET2
FG
SE_TOUT
SE_GND
SE_VOUT
SE_VCC
RET1
SCN1
SCN2
SCN3
SCN4
OUTP8
OUTP7
OUTP6
OUTP5
OUTP4
OUTP3
OUTP2
OUTP1
COM1
COM2
J613 2 5 J550
+5.1VC EXTMA-0A SG
DDR DIMM 1 4 A10 A7 A10 3 4 EXIT-MOT CST1- 3 A3 J517 J518
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
HUMIS-1A EXTMC-0A M P1BTM-1A +5.1VC
CN1
(M18)
CN4-1
CN5-1A
CN5-1B
2 3 A11 A6 A11 4 3 BTM-SNR 2 A4 A3 10 3 1 3 1 SFB-
SG EXTMB-0A (S30) +5.1VC SFBSW-1A
CN7 3 2 A12 A5 A12 5 2 1 A5 A4 9 4 2 2 2 FEED-SNR
10.2 DC Wire Harness
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SE_VOUT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
SG
CN109
INV-LCD PWA-F-DSP 2 J558 CST2- 3 A6
SE_GND SG P2BTM-1A
(INV-LCD) (DSP) 3 FEED- 3 A14 A3 A14 BTM-SNR 2 A7 J514 J519
A9
A7
A5
A4
A2
A1
A0
SE_TOUT SDCOV-1A +5.1VC SG
SG
NC
NC
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
NC
SG
SG
SG
NC
(S36)
BA1
BA0
/WE
CN337 J624 J633
CK1
CB0
CB1
CB2
CB3
CK2
SCL
4 COV-SNR 2 A15 A2 A15 CN605 1 A8 A6 7 6 5 1 1
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ8
DQ9
SDA
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
/CK1
/CK2
/CAS
DQ10
DQ11
CKE0
DQ16
DQ17
DQ18
DQ19
DQ24
DQ25
DQ26
DQ27
DQ32
DQ33
DQ34
DQ35
DQ40
DQ41
DQ55
DQ42
DQ43
DQ48
DQ49
DQ50
DQ51
DQ56
DQ57
DQ58
DQ59
VREF
+5.1VC DG SFBS0-1A
DQS0
DQS1
DQS2
DQS3
DQS8
DQS4
DQS6
DQS7
(S26) 1 A16 A1 A16 1 A19 A1 6 1 4 A7 6 7 4 2 2
VDD-ID
SG SFBS1-1A SFB-
2 A18 A2 5 2 3 DRUM-SUF-SNR J555 A8 5 8 3 3 3 SIZE-SNR
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DRV0-1A PLTRM-0A SFBS2-1A
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
CN2
(S28)
CN2
CN1
J592 J670 J628 3 A17 A3 4 3 2 (S13) CST-TRY-MOT2 2 2 B1 A9 4 9 2 4 4
TNMTON-0A +24VB M (M22) PLTRM-1A SFBS3-1A
1 5 1 10 1 1 B1 B16 B1 4 A16 A4 3 4 1 1 1 B2 A10 3 10 1 5 5
TNMTCW-0A
2 4 2 9 2 2 B2 B15 B2 J643 J516
TNR-MOT +5.1VC SG SG +24VC
M (M5) 3 3 3 8 3 3 B3 B14 B3 5 A15 A5 2 5 B DEV-SW CST3- 3 B3 A11 2 11 2 2 SFB-FEED-CLT
DG DEVSW-0A (SW3) P3BTM-1A SFBC-0A (CLT4)
4 2 4 7 4 4 B4 B13 B4 6 A14 A6 1 6 A BTM-SNR 2 B4 A12 1 12 1 1
+24VB (S42) +5.1VC NC
Slot [1] : CN803 5 1 5 6 5 5 B5 B12 B5 1 B5 A13
HOPSW-1A NC
1
2
3
4
Option
DISP
FRM
LOAD
CP
VDD
VSS
DF
D0
D1
D2
D3
VEE
VLCD
Slot [0] : CN802 CN115 CN115 6 5 6 6 B6 B11 B6 J644 A14 J527 J557
SG J629 J507 J594 SG SG
TIP 1 63 +3.3VA TNR-SW A 7 4 7 7 B7 B10 B7 DG CST4- 3 B6 B1 14 1 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
CN2 CN2 A1 TRST# +5.1VC 7 A13 A7 1 1 8 1 1 P4BTM-1A RGTAS-1
A7
A8
A9
B7
B8
B9
LCD(LCD) (SW2) MID-TR-SNR
RING 2 64 FRAME B 8 3 8 8 B8 B9 B8 +24VB BTM-SNR 2 B7 B2 13 2 2
1 BUSY 1 A2 +12VA TNRES-0 8 A12 A8 2 2 7 2 2 +5.1VC +5.1VC (S17)
(S48)
J526
BPMJ-3 3 65 CLKRUN J504 9 2 9 9 B9 B8 B9 RTNHMLK-0 HOP-MOT 1 B8 B3 12 3 1
2 SELECT 2 A3 TMS SG 9 A11 A9 3 3 6 3 3
A9
A8
A7
A6 A10
A5 A11
A4 A12
A3 A13
A2 A14
A1 A15
B9
B8
B7
B6 B10
B5 B11
B4 B12
B3 B13
B2 B14
B1 B15
M
A15 A1
A14 A2
A13 A3
A12 A4
A11 A5
A10 A6
B15 B1
B14 B2
B13 B3
B12 B4
B11 B5
B10 B6
CN801 BPMJ-1 4 66 TRDY 1 10 1 10 10 B10 B7 B10 RTNHMON-0A (M7)
3 NACK 3 A4 TD1 CN116
TCP TNR- DG 10 A10 A10 4 4 5 4 4 JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ/TWD(e-STUDIO600/720) model only
BPMJ-6 5 67 SERR (TCP) EMP-SNR 2 11 11 B11 B6 B11 NC NAD/DMJ(e-STUDIO603/723) model only J583
B 4 NFAULT 4 A5 +5.1VA 1 1 +3.3VA (S10) +24VB 5 +24VB B
BPMJ-2 6 68 STOP 3 12 12 B12 B5 B12 B4 11 4 11
5 PEERR 5 A6 INTA# 2 2 +3.3VA TNHMLK-0 J593 +24VB
BPMJ-7 7 69 SG 13 13 B13 B4 B13 DG B5 10 5 10
6 DATA[0] 6 A7 INTC# 3 3 +3.3VA TNHMON-0A 11 A9 A11 5 5 4 5 1 DG CN424
BPMJ-4 8 70 +3.3VA J505 J502 14 14 B14 B3 B14 +24VB J577 J645 CN332 B6 9 6 9 +24VB
7 DATA[1] 7 A8 +5.1VA 4 4 SG NC UFTCS-0 12 A8 A12 6 6 3 6 2 SG DG 1 3
BPMJ-8 9 71 PERR 1 4 1 15 15 B15 B2 B15 RTNMTLK-0 RCY-TNR-MOT 3 A1 A12 A1 B7 8 7 8 +24VB
8 DATA[2] 8 A9 RESERVED 5 5 -12VA NC SG 13 A7 A13 7 7 2 7 3 (M8) M FUS-TR-SNR HEXTS-1A MTMCK-0A 2 9
BPMJ-5 10 72 DEVSEL 2 3 2 16 16 B16 B1 B16 RTNMTON-0A (S9) 2 A2 A11 A2 B8 7 8 7 PWA-F- MTMA-0
9 DATA[3] 9 A10 +3.3VA 6 6 -12VA TNR-TR-MOT NC 14 A6 A14 8 8 1 8 4 +5.1VC DRVRST-0 3 1 MT-MOT
XSCL-1A
LP-1A
WF-1A
YP-1A
SG
BZON-0A
CPPOW-0A
LDCLKA
LDDAT-0A
LDLTH-0A
LDON1-0A
LDON0-0A
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
CPRST-0A
SG
RTS0-0A
CTS0-0A
SOUT0-0A
SIN0-0A
SG
UD3-1A
UD2-1A
UD1-1A
UD0-1A
SG
LCDEN-1A
LED1 GRNP 11 73 C/BE[1] M (M6) 3 2 3 17 17 RSTSW-0A NC 1 A3 A10 A3 B9 6 9 6 MOT2-MT MTMBB-0 (M17) M
10 DATA[4] 10 A11 RESERVED 7 7 +5.1VA NC 15 A5 A15 5 MTMRF-0A 4 11
LED2 YELP 12 74 SG 4 1 4 18 18 +24VB J524 J578 B10 5 10 5 (MOT2-MT) MTMB-0
11 DATA[5] 11 8 8 +5.1VA NC 16 A4 A16 +5VSW MTMEN-0A 5 7
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
CN105
ENABLE/DISABLE 13 75 AD[14] 5 NC NC 2 6 B MAIN-SW THMS-R-HTR 8 8 A4 A9 A4 B11 4 11 4 MTMAB-0
12 DATA[6] 12 9 9 +3.3VA 17 A3 A17 (SW6) (THM3) STH--1A NC 6 5
LED2 YELN 14 76 AD[15] J503 NC NC 1 5 A 5 5 A5 A8 A5 B12 3 12 3
13 DATA[7] 13 A14 +3.3VAUX 10 10 IDSEL0 TNR-MOT- 18 A2 A18 STH+-1A +5.1VC * Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC
CHSCND 15 77 SG A 1 1 NC NC 4 4 A6 A7 A6 B13 2 13 2
14 NINIT 14 A15 RST# 11 11 OPBINT(0) INTLCK-SW 19 A1 A19 J601 ETH--1A SG
RSV 16 78 AD[13] PWA-F-SYS (SW11) B 2 2 NC NC THMS-F-HTR 7 7 A7 A6 A7 B14 1 14 1
15 NSTROB 15 A16 +3.3VA 12 12 SG 20 A20 A20 J653 1 CH-CLN-MOT ETH+-1A
INTB 17 79 AD[12] 3 3 WCLMTB-0A M (THM1) 6 6 A8 A5 A8
16 NSELIN 16 A17 GNT# 13 13 IDSEL1 (SYS) J501 21 B19 B1 6 6 2 (M12) MTH--1A
+5.1VA 18 80 AD[11] 4 4 WCLMTA-0A 3 3 A9 A4 A9
17 NAUTDF 17 A18 SG 14 14 SG U-FRNT-COV-SW 2 22 B18 B2 5 5 J602 CN1 MTH+-1A
+3.3VA 19 81 AD[10] (SW7) +24VB THMS-C-HTR 2 2 A10 A3 A10
18 HLH 18 A19 PME# 15 15 PCICLK(3) 1 23 B17 B3 4 4 2 1 LP-ERS (THM2) FUSSW-1A
INTA 20 82 SG ERSLP-0A 1 1 A11 A2 A11 CN329 J639
19 SG 19 A20 AD[30] 16 16 SG 24 B16 B4 3 3 1 2 (ERS) NC NC SG
RSV 21 83 SG Standard CN110 SG J579 A12 A1 A12 1 A11 A1 3 CST1-
20 SG 20 A21 +3.3VA 17 17 REQ(1) 25 B15 B5 2 2 PTH--1A P1EMP-1A
RSV 22 84 AD[09] CN112 1 VBUS MCLSW-0A THMS-L-HTR 2 2 B1 B12 B1 2 A10 A2 2 EMP-SNR
21 SG 21 A22 AD[28] 18 18 REQ(0) VDD 26 B14 B6 1 1 B CH-CLN-POS-SW (THM4) PTH+-1A +5.1VC (S31)
SG 23 85 AD[08] 1 20 CN113 CN170 USB connector 2 D- CLNSW-0A 1 1 B2 B11 B2 3 A9 A3 1
22 SG 22 A23 AD[26] 19 19 +3.3VA NC /RESET 27 B13 B7 A (SW4)
PC interface (IEEE1284)
CLK 25 87 AD[07] 3 18 2 2 4 SG 1 12 DRTH-0A 3 B3 B10 B3 4 A8 A4 3
HRNS-HDD-DES-390
Scrambler board
24 SG 24 A25 AD[24] 21 21 AD[29] D- LRXD 29 B11 B9 J632 WEBED-0 P1TOP-1A CST1-
To Slot [0] or [1] DD7 WEB-SNR
RST 26 88 +3.3VA 4 17 3 3 2 11 SG (S8) 2 B4 B9 B4 5 A7 A5 2 TRY-SNR
25 SG 25 A26 IDSEL 22 22 SG D+ DD8 LRTS 30 B10 B10 9 9 +5.1VC +5.1VC (S32)
SG 27 89 +3.3VA 5 16 4 4 CN111 3 10 +12VE 1 B5 B8 B5 6 A6 A6 1
26 SG 26 To Slot [0] A27 +3.3VA 23 23 AD[27] NC DD6 LCTS 31 B9 B11 8 8 J604 WEBMTB-0A
+3.3VA 28 90 AD[05] 6 15 5 5 1 VBUS0 4 9 AG J581 B6 B7 B6
27 SG 27 A28 AD[22] 24 24 AD[25] NC DD9 LSBSY 32 B8 B12 7 7 1 THMS-DRM WEBMTA-0A SG
REQ 29 91 AD[06] 7 14 6 6 2 D- 5 8 CTDVR-1A (THM5) 3 3 B7 B6 B7 7 A5 A7 3 CST1-
28 SG 28 A29 AD[20] 25 25 +3.3VA DETACH DD5 PLRST 33 B7 B13 6 6 2 NC +5.1VC P1RGT-1A
GNT 30 92 AD[04] 8 13 7 7 3 D+ 6 7 CTDVD-1A WEB-MOT 2 2 B8 B5 B8 8 A4 A8 2 TR-SNR
29 SG 29 A30 SG 26 26 C/BE[3] NC DD10 RGTAS 34 B6 B14 J610 M WEBCN-0 +5.1VC (S33)
+3.3VA 31 93 RSV 9 12 8 8 4 SG 7 6 CTDVC-1A (M4) 4 4 B9 B4 B9 9 A3 A9 1
30 SG 30 A31 AD[18] 27 27 AD[23] SG DD4 USB connector CN106 MVDEN 35 B5 B15 5 5 1 SG NC
SG 32 94 AD[02] 10 11 9 9 (Host) 5 VBUS1 L/S 8 5 NC NC 1 1 B10 B3 B10 A2 A10
31 SG 31 A32 AD[16] 28 28 SG NC DD11 1 SG 36 B4 B16 4 4 2 NC NC NC
AD[31] 33 95 AD[03] 11 10 10 10 6 D- FULL-C 9 4 NC NC TNR-LVL-SNR B11 B2 B11 A1 A11
32 SG 32 A33 +3.3VA 29 29 AD[21] NC DD3 2 CMD 37 B3 B17 3 3 3 (S14) NC NC NC
PME 34 96 AD[00] 12 9 11 11 7 D+ NONO-C 10 3 NC NC B12 B1 B12 B11 B1 1st drawer
33 SG 33 A34 FRAME# 30 30 AD[19] /RESET DD12 3 CBSY 38 B2 B18 2 2 4 SG
C AD[29] 35 97 +5.1VA 13 8 12 12 8 SG B/W 11 2 NC NC 10 B10 B2 3 C
34 SG 34 A35 SG 31 31 +3.3VA NC DD2 4 Coin controller CACK 39 B1 B19 1 1 5 PCST1-1A CST1-SNR
PCI slot
16 16 A[10] 16 16 B2 TCK 60 60 SG Option IVSYNC B3 8 H1EER3-0 PCST2-1A CST2-SNR
D SG 23 12 A[12] 15 28 22 13 A[14] SG 14 A1 A20 A1 30 B9 B3 2 (S35)
D
17 17 A[8] 17 17 B3 SG 61 61 +3.3VA A IHSYNC B4 7 H1EER2-0 +5.1VC
SG 22 13 A[14] 16 27 21 14 A[16] +5.1VC 13 A2 A19 A2 31 B8 B4 1
18 18 A[6] 18 18 B4 TDO 62 62 +3.3VA SG B5 6 DEV-MOT H1EER1-0
+3.3VA 21 14 A[16] 17 26 20 15 A[18] DEVCK-1A (M10) M 12 A3 A18 A3
19 19 A[4] 19 19 B5 +5.1VA 63 63 +3.3VA IRCLK B6 5 IHDUTY-1A +24VC
INTRQ-1 CN114 CN171 20 15 A[18] 18 25 19 16 SG DG 11 A4 A17 A4 32 B7 B5 2 2 CST2-TR-CLT
20 20 A[2] 20 20 B6 +5.1VA 64 64 SG +12VA SG B7 4 SG P2RGC-0A (CLT7)
+3.3VA LP-EXPO 1 1 19 16 SG 19 24 18 17 SG DG 10 A5 A16 A5 33 B6 B6 1 1
21 21 A[0] 21 21 B7 INTB# 65 65 +12VA CN1 CN1 CN5 CN11 CN6 CN10 CN102 SG IVDEN B8 3 IH1ON-1
+5.1VA (EXP) CN2 DG +5.1VD SG 2 2 18 17 SG 20 23 17 18 D[1] +24VA 9 A6 A15 A6
22 22 +5.1VA 22 22 B8 INTD# 66 66 +12VA 5 1 1 30 34 1 MDT[0] 1 26 SG SG B9 2 H2PWR3-0A +24VC
-12VA 1 DG +5.1VD SG 3 3 17 18 D[1] 21 22 16 19 D[3] +24VA PWA-F-IH 8 A7 A14 A7 34 B5 B7 2 2 CST2-FEED-CLT
23 23 CEP1RST-0 23 23 B9 PRSNT1# 67 67 +5.1VA 4 2 2 29 33 2 MDT[2] 2 25 +5.1VA IHDEN B10 1 H2PWR2-0A P2FDC-0A (CLT8)
SG 2 INV-EXP LMPON-0A SG EXPON-0 4 4 16 19 D[3] 22 21 15 20 D[5] (IH) 7 A8 A13 A8 35 B4 B8 1 1
24 24 +5.1VA 24 24 B10 RESERVED 68 68 +5.1VA (INV-EXP) 3 3 3 28 32 3 MDT[4] 3 24 SG H2PWR1-0A
+12VA 3 +24VE SG +3.3VC 15 20 D[5] 23 20 14 21 D[7] 6 A9 A12 A9
25 25 SG 25 25 B11 PRSNT2# 69 69 +3.3VA 2 4 4 27 31 4 MDT[6] 4 23 IDCLK J619 J618 H1PWR3-0A SG
DA0 4 +24VE CCDRS-0 SG 14 21 D[7] 24 19 13 22 BOOTCS LDFAN-0A 5 A10 A11 A10 36 B3 B9 3
06/09
34 34 D[12] 34 34 B20 AD[31] 78 78 SG 13 18 22 13 PNLDT3 13 14 +5.1VA CN209 1 17 1 3 (M26) 1 1 NC
DD[10] J24 SG TX0-0 6 15 5 30 A[15] 27V 4 31 A[17] +36VB +36VB A19 A2 J537
35 35 D[14] 35 35 B21 AD[29] 79 79 PME +5.1VD 14 17 21 14 MAD[16] 14 13 +5.1VB 1 1 2 16 2 9 NC SG
DD[11] 3 A4 CCDCK1A-0 TX0-1 7 14 4 31 A[17] DG 3 32 ROMDETO-0 PG DRMA-0 J532 A20 A1 4 A8 A4 3 CST3-
36 36 SG 36 36 B22 SG 80 80 AD[30] APS-R APSR-0 15 16 PWA-F-CCD 20 15 MAD[18] 15 12 SG 2 2 3 15 3 1 DRM-MOT ATRC4-0A P3TOP-1A
DD[13] (S5) 2 A5 SG SG 8 13 3 32 ROMDT PMON-0A POL-MOT 2 33 +5.1VC PG DRMBB-0 M HRZ-DR-CLT1 2 2 B1 B20 B1 5 A7 A5 2 TRY-SNR
37 37 MOD2DET-0 37 37 B23 AD[27] 81 81 +3.3VA SG 16 15 (CCD) 19 16 SG 16 11 SG 3 3 M 4 14 4 11 (M11) +24VC +5.1VC
DD[14] 1 A6 CCD-EVEN-R TX1-0 9 12 2 33 +5.1VE PMOK-0A (M2) 1 34 LED-1 DRCLK-0A DRMB-0 (CLT1) 1 1 B2 B19 B2 6 A6 A6 1 (S44)
38 38 SG 38 38 B24 AD[25] 82 82 AD[28] 17 14 18 17 SG 17 10 SG 4 4 5 13 5 7 ATRC1-0A
DD[15] J23 SG TX1-1 10 11 1 34 LED-1 PMCLK-1A DRVRST-0 DRMAB-0 J529 B3 B18 B3 J538
39 39 DREQC2-1 39 39 B25 +3.3VA 83 83 AD[26] +5.1VD 18 13 17 18 MDT[1] 18 9 AG 5 5 6 12 6 5 +24VC SG
DIOR-0 3 A7 CCD-EDD-R SG 15 10 DRMVR-0A HRZ-DR-CLT2 2 2 B4 B17 B4 7 A5 A7 3 CST3
40 40 DACKC2-0 40 40 B26 C/BE[3]# 84 84 SG APS-C APSC-0 19 12 16 19 MDT[3] 19 8 AG 7 11 * Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC ATRC2-0A P3RGT-1A
DIOW-0 2 A8 SG TX2-0 16 9 CN325 DRMEN-1A (CLT2) 1 1 B5 B16 B5 8 A4 A8 2 TR-SNR
41 41 RXIN2 41 41 B27 AD[23] 85 85 AD[24] (S4) SG 20 11 15 20 MDT[5] 20 7 PWR-DN 8 10 +24VC +5.1VC
DMACK-0 1 A9 CCD-EVEN-L TX2-1 11 8 34 1 PD[0] DRMCW-0A PWA-F-MOT J530 B6 B15 B6 9 A3 A9 1 (S45)
42 42 AG 42 42 B28 SG 86 86 +3.3VA 21 10 14 21 MDT[7] 21 6 +12VB CN202 CN203 9 9
DLDCS0-1 J22 SG SG 14 7 +5.1VE 33 2 PD[2] +5.1VC (MOT) HRZ-DR-CLT3 2 2 J543
MODEM board
RESET-0 3 B1 CCD-ODD-L CLK-1 12 6 SG BEAMDT-0 PWA-F-SNS 32 3 PD[4] SG (CLT3) 1 1 10 A2 A10 2 2 LCF-PICK-SOL
44 44 AG 44 44 B30 AD[19] 88 88 AD[22] APS3 APS3-0 23 8 12 23 MAD[1] 23 4 +12VA 16 1 2 2 11 7 CN422 +24VC
DMARQ-1 2 B2 SG CLK-0 13 5 +5.1VH SG (SNS) 31 4 PD[6] TRMCK-0A +36VB J533 11 A1 A11 1 1 (SOL7)
45 45 MD2INT-1 45 45 B31 +3.3VA 89 89 AD[20] (S3) SG 24 7 11 24 MAD[3] 24 3 NC 15 2 3 1 12 6 1 3 SG
NC 1 B3 AG SG 4 +5.1VH 30 5 PRD-0 TRMVR-0A +36VB 3 B7 B14 B7 TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/
46 46 MOD2CS-0 46 46 B32 AD[17] 90 90 SG 25 6 10 25 MAD[5] 25 2 NC 14 3 13 5 2 9 HRZ-TR-SNR1 ADTR1-1A 3rd drawer
E WAKEUP-1 J21 AG SG 3 SG 29 6 PA[0] TRMEN-1A TRMA-0 2 B8 B13 B8 KRD/TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only E
47 47 MOD2RST-0 47 47 B33 C/BE[2]# 91 91 AD[18] +5.1VD 26 5 9 26 MAD[7] 26 1 NC 13 4 14 4 3 1 TRB-MOT (S19) +5.1VC NC NC
SG 3 B4 AG 2 DDISO1-1 e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723 28 7 PA[2] TRMCW-0 TRMBB-0 M 1 B9 B12 B9 12 B11 B1 J540
48 48 SG 48 48 B34 SG 92 92 AD[16] APS2 APS2-0 27 4 8 27 MAD[9] NC 12 5 15 3 4 11 (M14) SG SG
SG (S2) 2 B5 +12VD 1 WRAPC1-0 27 8 PA[4] PG TRMB-0 J534 B10 B11 B10 13 B10 B2 3
49 49 RXEN2-1 49 49 B35 IRDY# 93 93 +3.3VA SG 28 3 7 28 PNLDT0 11 6 16 2 5 7 ADTR2-1A PCST3-1A CST3-SNR
NC 1 B6 +12VD SG 26 9 PA[6] +36VB TRMAB-0 3 B11 B10 B11 14 B9 B3 2
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 50 50 B36 +3.3VA 94 94 FRAME 29 2 6 29 PNLDT2 10 7 17 1 6 5 HRZ-TR-SNR2 +5.1VC +5.1VC (S41)
+12VD CN9 J501 CN408 LVDS1-0 25 10 PA[8] (S20) 2 B12 B9 B12 15 B8 B4 1
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 B37 DEVSEL# 95 95 SG 30 1 5 30 MAD[15] +3.3VC +3.3VC PWA-F-LDR1 9 8 * Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC SG
J20 1 8 8 1 LVDS1-1 24 11 PA[10] 1 B13 B8 B13 J542
52 52 A[18] B38 SG 96 96 TRDY +5.1VD 4 31 MAD[17] SG SG (LDR1) 8 9 ADTR3-1A +24VC
3 B7 2 9 9 2 SG CN206 23 12 PA[12] J535 B14 B7 B14 16 B7 B5 2 2 CST3-TR-CLT
53 53 A[17] CN9 or CN4 B39 LOCK# 97 97 SG APS1 APS1-0 3 32 ROMDT-0 +5.1VD +5.1VD 7 10 PMCLK-1A +5.1VC P3RGC-0A
2 B8 3 10 10 3 SG 1 5 22 13 PA[14] 3 B15 B6 B15 17 B6 B6 1 1 (CLT9)
54 54 A[15] CN501 B40 PERR# 98 98 STOP (S1) SG 2 33 +5.1VD SG +5.1VD 6 11 PMOK-0A HRZ-TR-SNR3 SG
(PLG)
1 B9 4 11 11 4 WRLV1-1 2 4 21 14 PA[16] CN341 2 B16 B5 B16 J541
55 55 A[13] TXOUT1 1 1 B41 +3.3VA 99 99 +3.3VA CN8 J26 1 34 LED +12VD SG 5 12 PMON-0A POL-MOT NC (S21) ADCNT-1A +24VC
SCNM-BB 5 12 12 5 SKHSLV1-1 3 3 M 20 15 PA[18] CN341 J589 A1 J589 1 B17 B4 B17 18 B5 B7 2 2 CST3-FEED-CLT
(M2) SG SG
PWA-F-PLG
56 56 A[11] RXIN1 2 2 B42 SERR# 100 100 +3.3VA JPD/SAD/ASD/ASU/ 1 1 1 AG SG 4 13 DG A1 3 A2 3 NC P3FDC-0A (CLT10)
+36VC 6 13 13 6 +5.1VH 4 2 19 16 SG PSTPS-1 PSTPS-1 RGST-SNR B18 B3 19 B4 B8 1 1
57 57 A[9] CML1-1 3 3 B43 +3.3VA 101 101 SG AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/ 2 2 2 +24VE +12VD 3 14 +24VD A2 2 A3 2 NC
SCNM-B 7 14 14 7 +5.1VH 5 1 18 17 SG +5.1VC +5.1VC (S18) B19 B2 J539
58 58 A[7] LD1 4 4 B44 C/BE[1]# 102 102 SG TWD model only 3 3 3 SCAN-MOT DG AG 2 15 A3 1 A4 1 NC SG
SCNM-AB (M1) M 8 15 15 8 SG 17 18 PD[1] B20 B1 20 B3 B9 3 CST3-
59 59 A[5] EXTRG 5 5 B45 AD[14] 103 103 PAR 4 4 4 +36VD PWRDWN-1 1 16 J609 J609 P3FED-1A
+36VC 9 16 16 9 16 19 PD[3] RGTA-0A RGTA-0A 21 B2 B10 2 FEED-SNR
60 60 A[3] ATT3DB1-1 6 6 B46 SG 104 104 AD[15] 5 5 5 PG A4 1 A5 1 +5.1VC (S46)
SCNM-A 10 17 17 J210 J215 15 20 PD[5] +24VC +24VC 22 B1 B11 1
61 61 A[1] RLADJ11 7 7 B47 AD[12] 105 105 +3.3VA 6 6 6 PWRDWN-1 SG A5 3 A6 3
J18 CN3 11 CN404 1 35 14 21 PD[7] RGTC-0A RGTC-0A J561 J614 CN335
62 62 CPURST-0 RLADJ21 8 8 B48 AD[10] 106 106 AD[13] SG +36VD SG A6 5 A7 5 RGST-MOT STKSL-0A
Download jig (for PFC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
69 69 D[3] 20Hz/16Hz 15 15 B55 AD[05] 113 113 AD[6] DG WRAPC2-0 BMSW1-0 B1 8 B1 8 1 1 1 SG P4TOP-1A
CN4
3 3 4 4 8 11 6 9 27 6 29 PA[13] TRB-CAM-MOT 3 6 13 6 5 A7 A5 2 TRY-SNR
70 70 D[5] AG 16 16 B56 AD[03] 114 114 AD[4] SG BMSW0-0 TCMTB-0A TCMTB-0A (M15) M REV-SNR2 REVS2-1A +5.1VC
2 2 5 5 10 7 10 26 5 30 PA[15] B2 7 B2 7 2 2 2 2 7 12 7 6 A6 A6 1 (S50)
71 71 D[7] CI1-0 17 17 B57 SG 115 115 SG LVDS2-0 CSEXT-0 +5.1VC +5.1VC (S24) +5.1VC
SG
SG
1 1 6 6 PWA-F-LDR2 9 8 11 25 4 31 PA[17] B3 6 B3 6 3 J622 1 8 11 8
72 72 D[9] ANSDET1 18 18 B58 AD[01] 116 116 AD[2] NC LVDS2-1 LVCNT-0 TRCS1-0A TRCS1-0A SG
7 7 8 9 12 24 3 32 PROMDETO-0 B4 5 B4 5 4 1 J567 7 A5 A7 3
DFAK-0
(LDR2) CST4-
DFRQ-0
73 73 D[11] REVA1-0 19 19 B59 +3.3VA 117 117 AD[0] SG OSEL-0 SG SG TRB-SNR1 SG P4RGT-1A
DFTXD-0
DFRAK-0
DFCNT-0
DFSCST-0
+5.1VC +5.1VC (S16)
74 74 D[13] REVB1-0 20 20 B60 ACK64# 118 118 +3.3VA SG BMDIN-1 B6 3 B6 3 6 3 EXIT-SNR EXTSW-1A +5.1VC (S51)
6 11 14 22 1 34 PLED-1 TRCS2-0A TRCS2-0A (S22) 2 10 9 10 9 A3 A9 1
75 75 D[15] INTHOOK-0 21 21 B61 +5.1VA 119 119 +5.1VA WRLV2-1 BMSCK-1 +5.1VC NC
NC
NC
NC
CN1 5 12 15 21 B7 2 B7 2 7 J623 1 11 8 11 A2 A10
76 76 +5.1VA EXTHOOK-0 22 22 B62 +5.1VA 120 120 +5.1VA FG +24V SG CSINT-0 SG SG NC
F B8 1 B8 1 8 1 F
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Download jig (for RADF) PS-FAN-MOT1 1 4 13 16 20 TRB-SNR2 J568 A1 A11
77 77 +5.1VA +5.1VA 23 23 M PWRFN-0A +5.1VH DOUT SG NC
J16
2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
(M34) 4th drawer
10 10
11 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2 3 14 17 19 (S15) EXIT-COV-SW 2 12 7 12 B11 B1
78 78 CEP2CS-0 AG 24 24 +5.1VH EOUT PWA-F-SNS 3 (SW5) EXCSW-1A SG
CN2 2 15 18 18 CN402 CN344 1 13 6 13 10 B10 B2 3
79 79 DREQD2-1 +5.1VA 25 25 +24V SG MOUT (SNS) +24VA J596 J596 NC +5.1VC PCST4-1A CST4-SNR
PS-FAN-MOT2 1 1 16 19 17 1 1 SG SG J564 14 5 14 11 B9 B3 2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(S47)
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
80 80 DACKD2-0 -12VA 26 26 M (M35) PWRFN-0A NOUT +24VB B9 3 B9 3 ADUFA1-0A +5.1VC
2 20 16 2 2 TFUSW-1A TFUSW-1A USD-TNR- REV-FAN-MOT1 2 2 15 4 15 12 B8 B4 1
AG 27 27 +5.1VF +24VC B10 2 B10 2 FLL-SNR M (M24) +24VC
CN107 21 15 3 3 +5.1VC +5.1VC 1 1 16 3 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
FG
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
10
+12VA 28 28 e-STUDIO850/853 NC DG B11 1 B11 1 (S11) +24VC
J3
CN1
CN2
50 1 DATA0 22 14 4 4 NC J565 13 B7 B5 2 2 CST4-TR-CLT
+12VF 29 29 OUTAB-0 DG B12 ADUFA2-0A P4RGC-0A (CLT11)
49 2 DATA2 23 13 5 5 REV-FAN-MOT2 2 2 17 2 17 14 B6 B6 1 1
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
AG 30 30 +5.1VF DG +24VC
D0
D2
D4
D6
D1
D3
D5
D7
CN602
SG
SG
M (M25)
A10
A12
A14
A16
A18
A11
A13
A15
A17
*RD
e-STUDIO520/720 e-STUDIO600/850
LED
48 3 DATA4 24 12 6 6 1 1 18 1 18
*CS2
34 1 D[0] PWA-F-ADF CN15 CN47 NC +36VA +24VC
J417 CN211
+5.1VD
47 4 DATA6 +5.1VD CN407 25 11 7 7 e-STUDIO523/723 e-STUDIO603/853 15 B5 B7 2 2 CST4-FEED-CLT
33 2 D[2] 1 3 +5.1VE BMCK-0 +36VB P4FDC-0A
ROMSEL
46 5 DATA8 SG DF- 1 1 1 5 26 10 8 8 16 B4 B8 1 1 (CLT12)
32 3 D[4] CN9 or CN4
(ADF) 2 2 L-LMT-SNR +5.1VF +5.1VF PG J420 J560
45 6 DATA10 DLMTS (S62) 2 2 2 15 27 9 9 9 +24VB
FAX board
31 4 D[6] CN502 3 1 SG EOCNV-0 PG CN343 11 1 11 19 SG
44 7 DATA12 3 3 3 6 28 8 10 10 +24VB +24VB 17 B3 B9 3 CST4-
30 5 RD-0 TXB2 1 1 CN48 SG RSTITG-0 PWRFN-0A NC 1 15 10 2 10 20 P4FED-1A
43 8 DATA14 +5.1VD 4 4 4 16 29 7 11 11 TOLON-0A J415 DG 18 B2 B10 2 FEED-SNR
29 6 A[0] RXIN2 2 2 4 3 DF- +3.3VB WLOWL-0 2 14 +24VB 9 3 9 21 +5.1VC (S52)
42 9 A21 CN21 CN3 CN5 CN35 CN12 *LNGS 5 5 5 7 30 6 CN406 KCTRC-1A 5 1 DG 19 B1 B11 1
28 7 A[2] CML2-1 3 3 +24VG UDMOT_*B +5.1VD 5 2 LENG-SNR +12VC WUPPL-0 +3.3VD 3 13 +24VB 8 4 8 22
41 10 A19 DF-COV- 4 1 1 DF- 3 1 LNGLED (S63) 6 6 6 13 31 5 1 12 MCRUN-0A 2 2 REVMC-0A
27 8 A[4] LD2 4 4 *COPSW UDMOT_B SG 6 1 SG +5.1VF +5.1VC 4 12 MTMA-0 PWA-F- 7 5 7 23 JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ/
40 11 A17 INTLCK-SW 2 2 2 COV-SNR 2 2 7 7 7 8 32 4 2 13 EXTCTR-0A REV-MOT 6 3 DRVRST-0 TWD(e-STUDIO600/720) model only
26 9 A[6] SG 5 5 (SW10) C_COM UDMOT_*A (S61) COPS AG +5.1VF SG 5 11 M (M19) MTMBB-0 MOT2-RV 6 6 6 24
39 12 A15 1 3 3 DF-TRY-MOT 1 3 8 8 8 11 33 3 3 14 DG 1 4 RVNVR-0A
25 10 A[8] ATT3DB2-1 6 6 UDMOT_A (M38) M PWR-DN SG SG 6 10 MTMB-0 (MOT2-RV) 5 7 5 25
38 13 A13 CN22 4 CN36 CN51 CN50 CN49 9 9 9 9 34 2 4 15 BKCTR-0A 3 5 REVME-0A
24 11 A[10] RLADJ12 7 7 +24VG +24V +5.1VD +5.1VD SG PWR-DN 7 9 MTMAB-0 4 8 4 26
37 14 A11 DF-OPN- 4 4 5 DF- 3 4 7 3 1 3 DF- CN403 35 1 5 16 MNCTR-0A 4 6 REVCW-0A
23 12 A[12] RLADJ22 8 8 *DFOPSW +24V SG SG +24VD +12VE 8 8 Copy Key Card 3 9 3 27
36 15 A09 INTLCK-SW 2 5 6 EMP-SNR 2 5 8 2 2 2 MID-TR-SNR 1 10 10 3 6 17 SG +5.1VC CN345 J503 J506
22 13 A[14] SG 9 9 (SW9) DF_COM (S60) EMPS CSEN (S70) DG AG 9 7 2 10 2 28 +5.1VC
35 16 A07 1 6 1 6 9 1 3 1 2 11 11 4 7 18 SIZE3-0A SG 1 A11 11 1 LCF-
21 14 A[16] AG 10 10 NC +36VC NC 10 6 1 11 1 29 TLFBTM-1A
34 17 A05 CN37 10 3 12 12 1 19 SIZE2-0A NC 2 A10 10 2 BTM-SNR
20 15 A[18] -12VA 11 11 +5.1VD PG 11 5 30 SG (S71)
33 18 A03 CN6 DF- 3 7 4 13 13 2 CN212 J217 20 SIZE1-0A NC 3 A9 9 3
19 16 SG AG 12 12 SMOT_*B SG +5.1VH GLV2-0 12 4 31
32 19 RDX CN24 CN23 CN4 1 U-LMT-SNR 2 8 5 14 14 14 1 2 MIR-GLV SIZE0-0A NC J508
18 17 SG +12VA 13 13 +24V SMOT_B (S59) ULMTS SG GLV2-1 13 3 32 +5.1VC
31 20 CS0-A DF-SD-SOL 1 2 1 2 1 9 CN16 CN52 6 15 15 12 2 1 (GLV) +5.1VC NC 4 A8 8 1 LCF-
17 18 D[1] NC 14 14 (SOL4) SSOL SMOT_*A +5.1VD NC NC 14 2 33 TLLEMP-1A
30 21 CS0-B 2 1 2 3 DF-S-EXIT-MOT 1 3 DF- 16 16 10 CTRCN2-0 NC 5 A7 7 2 EMP-SNR
16 19 D[3] +5.1VA 15 15 SMOT_A (M40) M SG 15 1 34 SG (S74)
29 22 +3.3VA 4 2 2 SD-EXIT-SNR CN330 NC 6 A6 6 3
15 20 D[5] AG 16 16 CN26 CN25 +24V SHS (S67) e-STUDIO850/853 35
28 23 +3.3VA +24V 5 CN38 CN42 CN43 CN13 3 1 30 1 SG NC J512
14 21 D[7] CI2-0 17 17 1 3 3 +24V +5.1VD 36 +5.1VC
27 24 SG DENG-SOL NC 6 DF- 3 1 12 1 CN53 29 2 +5.1VC 7 A5 5 1 LCF-
Option
SG OUT3
18 33 DATA15 CN29 CN55 CN54 CN11 6 SIZE-SNR3 2 8 5 8 20 11 HVTBB-0A 17 19 19 A6 16 B8 19 1 LCF-ENDF-
AG
NC
AG
NC
SG
4 31 A[17] 27 27 +5.1VD NC SIZS3 6 7 A B B E Transfer belt power supply roller LCFDMB-0A TLTGE-1A
DG
(S58) Option WE
PS-HVT
17 34 A20 DF- 3 1 6 1 7 1 9 4 9 19 12 HVMVR-1A 18 20 20 A7 17 B7 18 2 STP-SNR
3 32 ROMDET0-0 +12VA 28 28 SG 7 6 LCFDMA-0A SG
+12VF
+24VF
+24VF
NC
NC 9 42 A04 5 DF- 3 1 7 10 11 20 AD5 4 6 6 B4 23 B1 12
3 CN31 CN32 CN33 +24V SG F-CNT LC-TRAYUP +5.1VC
8 43 A02 +5.1VD 6 TRY-SNR 2 2 6 9 10 21 AD7 5 7 7 B5 24
2
1
3
DF- 3 1 3 7 (S53) TRYS Finisher NC J559 LC-BTH
CN811
Speaker 7 44 A22 *LOUTS 1 3 5 8 9 22 I/O1 NC 6 8 8 B6 J588
CN401 CN812 LD-EXIT-SNR 2 2 2 8 NC CN351 9 LC-CST TLTRM-0A
SG 6 45 /CS LOUTLED CN45 CN46 7 8 23 I/O3 PFMON-0A 7 9 9 B7 10 2 LCF-TRY-MOT
8 1 (S68) 1 3 1 9 +5.1VD NC 1 8 LC-PEMP TLTRM-1A M
AG 5 46 +3.3VA CN9 DF- 1 3 4 6 7 24 I/O5 SG 8 10 10 B8 11 1 (M41)
7 2 CN34 KMOT_*B TRVR NC 2 7 LC-SET
NC 4 47 RMSL +5.1VD 1 TRY-VR-SNR 2 2 5 5 6 25 I/O7 +5.1VC 9 11 11 B9
6 3 DF- 3 10 KMOT_B (S54) SG SG 3 6 LC-JUDGE
NC 3 48 /WRX SG 2 3 1 6 4 4 5 26 SG PFMCK-1A FEED-MOT 10 12 12 B10 TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/
5 4 APS-SNR 2 11 KMOT_*A NC TXD 4 5 M +5.1VC
FAX
board
NC 2 49 SG APS 3 DF-FEED-MOT 7 3 3 4 27 OE PG (M20) 11 13 13 B11 TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only
4 (S64) 1 12 KMOT_A M SG 5 4 NC
-12VA 1 50 SG NC 4 (M37) 2 2 3 28 RST-0 PG 2 2
power relay
3 13 +24V RXD 6 3
+12VA 5 1 1 2 29 VDD +36VA 1 1
2 +24V 7 2
NC 6 1 30 SG +36VA FG FG
2
1
1 8 1 Option
CN810
H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10.3 Electric Parts Layout
1) Scanner unit 1) Scanner unit 2) Control panel 3) Laser unit 3) Laser unit 4) Fuser related section
a. A4 series c. Heater, thermostat a. e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723 b. e-STUDIO850/853
S5 M1
S4
INV-EXP M23 THM3 M3
S6 SLG THM2
KEY2 SW1
THMO3 THMO1
THM1
LDR1
INV-LCD LDR1 THMO2
DH2
LDR2
CCD S7
S3
EXP S1
PLG
S2
M4
KEY1
DH1 PLG IH-COIL
TCP/LCD GLV
1) Scanner unit
b. LT series S9
S5 M1 M2 M2
S4 DSP
CCD
S3
EXP
S2
5) Toner cartridge related section 6) Toner recycle / used toner recovery unit 7) Developer unit / drum/ transfer belt unit related section 7) Developer unit / drum/ transfer belt unit related section 8) Paper transport unit 9) Paper exit / reverse section
a. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, lamp, thermistor b. Heater, thermostat, PC board
S13
M10 S22
M16 S18 S23
M11 S12
SW2 DH3
SW4
M5 S11 M13 SW3 S17
M14 CLT3
M8
S10 M17
SOL1
CLT2
M9 THM5 M18
M7 S15
CLT1
M6
M12
M24
S16
ERS
M19
S14
10) Equipment (left view) 11) Equipment (right view) 12) Bypass feed unit 13) Paper feeding section 14) Tandem LCF 15) Equipment (rear view)
SW6 M32
M27 S27 S30
S31
SW11 MOT
S32
M30 M21 HDD
M28 SW7 S33
CLT4
S34 SOL7
S72
SOL3
M31 M33
CLT5 SOL8 HVT
CLT6
S29
S39 SYS
M29 CLT7
S28
IH S38 CLT8
S37 S35 M42
S36 M20
S40 CLT9
CLT10
S41
CLT11 M41
CLT12
S47
S25 S45 M34
SW8 MOT2-MT S44 S43 S48 LGC
S42 S49 S73 M35
M22 S71
M26 S46 S50 S74
S51 PS
S75
S26 S52
16) AC input section 16) AC input section 16) AC input section 16) AC input section 17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) 17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF)
a. e-STUDIO600/720: JPD model b. e-STUDIO850: JPD model c. e-STUDIO520: TNA/NAD model, d. e-STUDIO520: AUD/DAU/MJD/DMJ model, a. Sensor c. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, PC board
e-STUDIO600/720: TNA/NAD/SAD/TWD model, e-STUDIO600/720/850: ARD/AUD/DAU/MJD/DMJ/CND/KRD model,
SOL4
e-STUDIO850: TNA/NAD/SAD model, e-STUDIO850: TWD model SW10 M40 SW9
e-STUDIO523/603/723/853: TNA/NAD model e-STUDIO523/603/723/853: ARD/MJD/DMJ/CND model ADF
S53 M37
S54 M36
S57
S64
S56
M38
SOL6
S55 S58 M39 SOL5
S65
17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) 17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF)
b. Sensor d. Sensor
S60 S59
S61
NF1 NF1 NF1
RLY
S67
BRK1
BRK2
BRK1 NF1 FIL BRK1
S62 S66
NF2
BRK1
S69
S63
S68 S70
Motors Sensors and Switches Wire harness Electromagnetic spring clutches Lamps and heaters
Symbol Name Figure
Wire harness Wire harness location Wire harness Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure
location location CST4-EMP-SNR location location
SCAN-MOT 1)-a APS1-3, APS-C, APS-R 1)-a 4th drawer empty sensor HRZ-DR-CLT1 LP-EXPO 1)-a
M1 8-B S1-5 2-E S49 13) 8-F CLT1 8) 7-E EXP 2-D
Scan motor 1)-b Automatic original detection sensor 1)-b * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 Exposure lamp 1)-b
TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
POL-MOT 3)-a HOME-SNR 1)-a HRZ-DR-CLT2 LP-ERS
M2 5-E S6 2-F CST4-TRY-SNR CLT2 8) 7-E ERS 7)-a 6-C
Polygonal motor 3)-b Carriage home position sensor 1)-b Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 Discharge LED
4th drawer tray-up sensor
FUS-MOT TEMP/HUMI-SNR S50 13) 8-F HRZ-DR-CLT3 IH-COIL
M3 4) 7-D S7 2) 5-A * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and CLT3 8) 7-E IH-COIL 4) AC wire harness
Fuser motor Temperature/humidity sensor Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 IH coil
TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
WEB-MOT WEB-SNR CST4-TR-SNR SFB-FEED-CLT SCN-DH-L
M4 4) 7-C S8 4) 7-C CLT4 12) 8-B DH1 1)-c AC wire harness
Web motor Web detection sensor 4th drawer transport sensor Bypass feed clutch Scanner damp heater (Left)
S51 13) 8-F
TNR-MOT FUS-TR-SNR * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and CST1-TR-CLT SCN-DH-R
M5 5) 5-B S9 4) 7-B CLT5 13) 8-C DH2 1)-c AC wire harness
New toner supply motor Fuser transport sensor TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 1st drawer transport clutch Scanner damp heater (Right)
TNR-TR-MOT TNR-EMP-SNR CST4-FEED-SNR CST1-FEED-CLT DRM-DH
M6 5) 5-B S10 5) 5-B CLT6 13) 8-C DH3 7)-b AC wire harness
New toner transport motor Toner cartridge empty detection sensor 4th drawer feed sensor 1st drawer feed clutch Drum damp heater
S52 13) 8-F
HOP-MOT USD-TNR-FLL-SNR * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and CST2-TR-CLT
M7 6) 6-B S11 6) 6-F TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 CLT7 13) 8-D
Hopper motor Toner bag full detection sensor 2nd drawer transport clutch Thermistors and thermostats
DF-TRY-SNR
RCY-TNR-MOT ATTNR-SNR S53 17)-a 3-H CST2-FEED-CLT Wire harness
M8 6) 6-B S12 7)-a 5-A Original tray sensor CLT8 13) 8-D Symbol Name Figure
Recycle toner transport motor Auto-toner sensor 2nd drawer feed clutch location
DF-TRY-VR-SNR
USD-TNR-MOT DRUM-SUF-SNR S54 17)-a 3-H CST3-TR-CLT THMS-F-HTR
M9 6) 7-C S13 7)-a 6-B Original tray width sensor CLT9 13) 8-E THM1 4) 7-B
Used toner transport motor Drum surface potential sensor 3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport clutch Fuser roller front thermistor
DEV-MOT TNR-LVL-SNR DF-RGST-SNR CST3-FEED-CLT
S55 17)-a 3-G THMS-C-HTR
M10 7)-a 6-D S14 7)-a 6-C Original registration sensor CLT10 13) 8-E THM2 4) 7-B
Developer unit motor Image quality sensor 3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed clutch Fuser roller center thermistor
DF-SIZE-SNR1
DRM-MOT TRB-SNR2 S56 17)-a 3-G CST4-TR-CLT THMS-R-HTR
M11 7)-a 6-E S15 7)-a 6-F Original width detection sensor-1 THM3 4) 7-B
Drum motor Transfer belt release detection sensor 4th drawer transport clutch Fuser roller rear thermistor
DF-SIZE-SNR2 CLT11 13) 8-F
CH-CLN-MOT TRB-SNR1 * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and
M12 7)-a 6-B S16 7)-a 6-F S57 17)-a 3-G THMS-L-HTR
Original width detection sensor-2 TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 THM4 4) 7-C
Wire cleaner drive motor Transfer belt contact detection sensor Pressure roller thermistor
DF-SIZE-SNR3 CST4-FEED-CLT
DRM-CLN-MOT MID-TR-SNR S58 17)-a 3-G THMS-DRM
M13 7)-a 6-D S17 8) 8-B Original width detection sensor-3 4th drawer feed clutch THM5 7)-a 6-C
Cleaning brush drive motor Intermediate transport sensor CLT12 13) 8-F Drum thermistor
DF-U-LMT-SNR * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and
TRB-MOT RGST-SNR S59 17)-b 3-G TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 THERMO-C-HTR
M14 7)-a 6-E S18 8) 6-E Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor THMO1 4) AC wire harness
Transfer belt motor Registration sensor
DF-EMP-SNR Fuser roller center thermostat
TRB-CAM-MOT HRZ-TR-SNR1 S60 17)-b 3-G
M15 7)-a 6-F S19 8) 7-E Original empty sensor Solenoids THMO2
THERMO-S-HTR
4) AC wire harness
Transfer belt cam motor Horizontal transport sensor-1 Fuser roller side thermostat
DF-COV-SNR Wire harness
RGST-MOT HRZ-TR-SNR2 S61 17)-b 3-G Symbol Name Figure THERMO-SCN-DH
M16 8) 6-F S20 8) 7-E Jam access cover sensor location THMO3 1)-c AC wire harness
Registration motor Horizontal transport sensor-2 Scanner damp heater thermostat
DF-L-LMT-SNR SPRT-FING-SOL
MT-MOT HRZ-TR-SNR3 S62 17)-b 4-F SOL1 7)-a 6-C THERMO-DRM-DH
M17 8) 8-B S21 8) 7-E Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Drum separation finger solenoid
Transport motor Horizontal transport sensor-3 THMO4 7)-b AC wire harness
DF-LENG-SNR GATE-SOL Drum damp heater thermostat
EXIT-MOT EXIT-SNR S63 17)-b 4-F SOL2 9) 7-F
M18 9) 6-A S22 9) 7-F Original length detection sensor Gate solenoid
Exit motor Exit sensor SFB-SOL
DF-APS-SNR SOL3 12) 8-A Transformer
REV-MOT REV-SNR1 S64 17)-c 2-H Bypass pickup solenoid
M19 9) 7-G S23 9) 7-F APS operation sensor Wire harness
Reverse motor Reverse sensor-1 DF-SD-SOL Symbol Name Figure
DF-OPN-SNR SOL4 17)-c 2-G location
FEED-MOT REV-SNR2 S65 17)-c 2-G Small original exit solenoid
M20 13) 6-H S24 9) 7-F RADF opening/closing sensor PS-HVT
Feed motor Reverse sensor-2 DF-LD-SOL HVT 15) 6-G
DF-SD-REV-SNR SOL5 17)-c 2-G High-voltage transformer
CST-TRY-MOT1 SFB-COV-SNR S66 17)-d 4-G Large original exit solenoid
M21 13) 7-A S25 11) 5-A Small original reverse sensor DENG-SOL
Tray-up motor-1 Bypass feed unit cover sensor SOL6 17)-c 2-G
CST-TRY-MOT2 FEED-COV-SNR DF-SD-EXIT-SNR Large original exit roller release solenoid Others
S67 17)-d 4-G
S26 11) 5-B Small original exit sensor LCF-PICK-SOL
M22 Tray-up motor-2
13) 7-B
Feed cover sensor Wire harness
DF-LD-EXIT-SNR Tandem LCF pickup solenoid Symbol Name Figure
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and SFB-FEED-SNR S68 17)-d 2-H SOL7 13) 8-E location
S27 12) 8-A * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all
TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 Large original exit sensor
Bypass feed sensor equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 INV-EXP 1)-a
SLG-FAN-MOT 1)-a DF-READ-SNR INV-EXP 2-D
M23 2-E SFB-SIZE-SNR S69 17)-d 2-G LCF-ENDF-SOL Lamp inverter board 1)-b
SLG board cooling fan 1)-b S28 12) 8-B Read sensor
Bypass paper size detection sensor Tandem LCF end fence solenoid LCD
SOL8 14) 8-H LCD 2) 3-B
REV-FAN-MOT1 DF-MID-TR-SNR * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all
LCD panel
M24 9) 7-F CST1-SNR S70 17)-d 4-G
Reverse section cooling fan-1 S29 13) 8-C Original intermediate transport sensor equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
1st drawer detection sensor TCP
REV-FAN-MOT2 LCF-BTM-SNR TCP 2) 3-B
M25 9) 7-F CST1-BTM-SNR Touch panel
Reverse section cooling fan-2 S30
1st drawer bottom sensor
13) 7-A
S71
Tandem LCF bottom sensor
14) 8-G
PC boards
INV-LCD
IH-FAN-MOT * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all Wire harness INV-LCD 2) 3-A
M26 10) 7-E CST1-EMP-SNR equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 Symbol Name Figure LCD inverter board
IH board cooling fan S31 13) 8-C location
1st drawer empty sensor LCF-MST-SNR MIR-GLV
DCT-O-FAN-MOT CST1-TRY-SNR PWA-F-CCD 1)-a GLV Galvanic mirror 3)-b 5-G
M27 10) 7-C S32 13) 8-C Standby side mis-stacking sensor CCD 3-E
Duct out fan 1st drawer tray-up sensor S72 14) 8-G CCD driving PC board (CCD board) 1)-b * Only for e-STUDIO850/853
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all
FUS-FAN-MOT CST1-TR-SNR equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 PWA-F-SLG 1)-a HDD
M28 10) 6-D S33 13) 8-C SLG 3-F HDD 15) 4-C
Fuser cooling fan 1st drawer transport sensor LCF-ENDF-HP-SNR Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) 1)-b Hard disk
EXIT-FAN-MOT CST1-FEED-SNR End fence home position sensor PWA-F-DSP PS-ACC 5-G
M29 10) 7-C S34 13) 8-C S73 14) 8-G DSP 2) 4-A PS 15)
Exit section cooling fan 1st drawer feed sensor * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all Display PC board (DSP board) Switching regulator AC wire harness
DCT-I-FAN-MOT CST2-SNR
equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 PWA-F-KEY1 16)-a
M30 11) 6-D S35 13) 8-D KEY1 2) 4-A
Duct in fan LCF-EMP-SNR Key PC board-1 (KEY1 board) NS-FIL1 16)-b
2nd drawer detection sensor NF1 AC wire harness
DEV-FAN-MOT S74 Standby side empty sensor 14) 8-G PWA-F-KEY2 Noise filter-1 16)-c
M31 11) 6-D CST2-BTM-SNR KEY2 2) 3-A
Developer unit fan S36 13) 7-A * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all Key PC board-2 (KEY2 board) 16)-d
2nd drawer bottom sensor equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LSU-FAN-MOT PWA-F-PLG 3)-a NS-FIL2
M32 11) 6-D CST2-EMP-SNR LCF-ENDF-STP-SNR PLG 5-E
Laser unit cooling fan S37 13) 8-D Laser control PC board (PLG board) 3)-b NF2 Noise filter-2 16)-b AC wire harness
2nd drawer empty sensor End fence stop position sensor
SYS-FAN-MOT S75 14) 8-G PWA-F-LDR1 3)-a * Only forJPD model of e-STUDIO850
M33 15) 5-C CST2-TRY-SNR * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all LDR1 4-E
SYS board cooling fan S38 13) 8-D Laser driving PC board-1 (LDR1 board) 3)-b 16)-a
2nd drawer tray-up sensor equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
PS-FAN-MOT1 PWA-F-LDR2 BREAKER1 16)-b
M34 15) 4-F CST2-TR-SNR FSR-SW BRK1 AC wire harness
Switching regulator cooling fan-1 S39 13) 8-D SW1 4) AC wire harness LDR2 Laser driving PC board-2 (LDR2 board) 3)-b 4-F Breaker-1 16)-c
2nd drawer transport sensor Fuser detection switch
* Only for e-STUDIO850/853 models 16)-d
PS-FAN-MOT2 CST2-FEED-SNR TNR-SW
M35 15) 4-F S40 13) 8-D SW2 5) 5-B PWA-F-SNS 3)-a 5-E BREAKER2
Switching regulator cooling fan-2 2nd drawer feed sensor Toner cartridge detection switch SNS
H-sync detection PC board (SNS board) 3)-b 5-F BRK2 Breaker-2 16)-b AC wire harness
DF-READ-MOT CST3-SNR DEV-SW
M36 17)-c 3-H S41 13) 8-E SW3 7)-a 6-B PWA-F-FUS * Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850
Read motor 3rd drawer detection sensor Developer unit detection switch Fuse PC board (FUS board) RELEY
DF-FEED-MOT CH-CLN-POS-SW FUS 7)-b AC wire harness
M37 17)-c 3-H CST3-BTM-SNR * Optional for TNA/NAD/MJD/DMJ model, standard for other mod- RLY Relay 16)-b AC wire harness
Document feed motor SW4 7)-a 6-C
3rd drawer bottom sensor Wire cleaner position detection switch els * Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850
S42 13) 7-B
DF-TRY-MOT * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and EXIT-COV-SW PWA-F-IH
M38 17)-c 3-G SW5 9) 7-F IH 10) 7-D
Tray lift motor TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 Exit cover switch Heater control PC board (IH board)
DF-L-EXIT-MOT CST3-EMP-SNR MAIN-SW 6-B PWA-F-MOT
M39 17)-c 3-G S43 13) 8-E SW6 10) MOT 15) 6-E
Large original exit motor 3rd drawer / tandem LCF empty sensor Main switch AC wire harness Motor driving PC board (MOT board)
DF-S-EXIT-MOT CST3-TRY-SNR U-FRNT-COV-SW PWA-F-MOT2-MT
M40 17)-c 3-G S44 13) 8-E SW7 10) 5-B MOT2-MT 11) 8-B
Small original exit motor 3rd drawer / tandem LCF tray-up sensor Front cover switch Transport motor driving PC board (MOT2-MT board)
LCF-TRY-MOT CST3-TR-SNR COV-INTLCK-SW PWA-F-MOT2-RV
S45 13) 8-E SW8 10) AC wire harness MOT2-RV 9) 7-G
M41 Tandem LCF tray-up motor 14) 8-H
3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport sensor Cover interlock switch Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board)
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all CST3-FEED-SNR PWA-F-SYS
S46 13) 8-E DF-OPN-INTLCK-SW SYS 15) 3-B
equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 SW9 17)-c 2-G
3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed sensor RADF opening/closing switch System control PC board (SYS board)
LCF-ENDF-MOT CST4-SNR PWA-F-LGC
Tandem LCF end fence motor DF-COV-INTLCK-SW LGC 15) 6-A
M42 14) 8-G 4th drawer detection sensor SW10 17)-c 2-G Logic PC board (LGC board)
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all S47 13) 8-F Jam access cover opening/closing switch
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and PWA-F-FIL
equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850 TNR-MOT-INTLCK-SW
TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 SW11 10) 5-B Filter PC board (FIL board)
Toner motor interlock switch FIL 16)-c AC wire harness
CST4-BTM-SNR * Only for TNA/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
4th drawer bottom sensor of e-STUDIO600/720
S48 13) 7-B
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and PWA-F-ADF
TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720 ADF 17)-c 3-F
RADF control PC board (ADF board)
07/11